JP5447254B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to Yu technique machine.

Conventionally, in the Yu technique machine, control the gaming machine is configured to perform the main control means and the sub-control means. For example, the main control of the game is performed by the main control unit, while the display control of the effect image in the image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device provided in the gaming machine is performed by the sub control unit.

In recent years, in order to further interest improvement of the game, an effect image to be displayed on the image display unit tends to be diversified.

JP 2006-223598 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines, there is a problem that processing with a wide variety of Starring output image may cause personal complicated and thickened.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily diversifying display modes such as effect images displayed on the image display means. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and the sub-control Image display means for displaying an image based on control by the means, and the sub-control means includes an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and the image drawing means. First image storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of image information used for drawing an image, and reading operation is possible at higher speed than the first image storage means, and the image information stored in the first image storage means Second image storage means capable of storing and rewriting the stored image information, and a reading operation faster than the first image storage means, and storing the image information stored in the first image storage means The A third image storage means, a first display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes, and a plurality of the display types, A first regulation information storage unit that stores first regulation information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for rendering an image to be displayed in the display type; First selection means for selecting the first specified information corresponding to the display type from the first specified information storage means, a first pointer means that is updated every time, and each time the first pointer means is updated. In addition, the drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, and the drawing information special feature. Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for the one screen specified by the means; The drawing information specified for each screen in the specifying information includes specifying information for specifying image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen, and the drawing instruction information generating means includes the drawing information specifying means. Based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the means, drawing instruction information including image instruction information for instructing image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen from the specifying information included in the drawing information And the image drawing means stores the image information stored in the second image storage means and the third image storage means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generation means. Of the stored image information, the image information indicated by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information is used to draw an image for one screen, and the sub-control unit includes the drawing instruction When one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing unit in accordance with the image instruction information included in the information, the first image storage unit to the second image storage unit before the image information is used. The first transfer control means for controlling the transfer of the image information and a part of the image information stored in the first image storage means are transferred to the third image storage means when starting up by turning on the power. Second transfer control means for controlling the image information transferred by the second transfer control means until at least a predetermined trigger is released. The image information held and transferred by the first transfer control means is image information not held in the third image storage means, and is transferred to the third image storage means under the control of the second transfer control means. The image information includes power-on image information used for drawing an image to be displayed on the image display means when the gaming machine is starting up by power-on, and the second transfer control means The image information at power-on is controlled to be transferred from the first image storage means to the third image storage means first among the image information to be transferred to the third image storage means, The image drawing means transfers the image information read from the first image storage means when the image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the third image storage means by the second transfer control means. 3 image memory Transfer image storage means for temporarily storing before writing to the stage, wherein the second transfer control means transfers the transfer image when transferring the power-on image information to the third image storage means. The temporary writing of the power-on image information to the storage means is not executed, and the power-on image information is controlled to be directly transferred from the first image storage means to the third image storage means, When transferring image information other than power-on image information to the third image storage means, the image information read from the first image storage means is temporarily stored in the transfer image storage means, and the transfer is performed. Control is performed to transfer the image information stored in the image storage means to the third image storage means .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the control by the sub-control means. Image display means for displaying an image, and the sub-control means is used for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and for drawing an image by the image drawing means. A first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information and a read operation that is faster than the first image storage means, storing the image information stored in the first image storage means, and storing the image information Second image storage means capable of rewriting the image information to be rewritten, and a third image storage capable of reading operation faster than the first image storage means and storing the image information stored in the first image storage means means A first display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from among a plurality of display modes, and provided for each of the plurality of display types, which should be displayed in the display type A first regulation information storage unit that stores first regulation information that regulates drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image for each screen; and the display type that corresponds to the display type identified by the first display identification unit The first selection means for selecting the first specified information from the first specified information storage means, the first pointer means that is updated every time, and the first selection means each time the first pointer means is updated. Based on the first specified information selected by the means, the drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, and the drawing information specifying means specified by the drawing information specifying means. In addition, the first prescribed information includes a drawing instruction information generating unit that generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing unit to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for the one screen. The drawing information defined for each screen includes specifying information for specifying image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen, and the drawing instruction information generating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. Further, based on the drawing information for the one screen, generating drawing instruction information including image instruction information for instructing image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen from the specific information included in the drawing information, The image drawing means, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, image information stored in the second image storage means and image information stored in the third image storage means. The image information specified by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information is used to draw an image for one screen, and the sub-control unit includes the sub-control means included in the drawing instruction information. When one image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means according to the image instruction information, the image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means before the image information is used. A first transfer control unit that controls the first image storage unit, and a control unit that controls to transfer a part of the image information stored in the first image storage unit to the third image storage unit when the power-on startup is performed. 2 transfer control means, and the third image storage means holds the image information transferred under the control of the second transfer control means until at least a predetermined trigger is reached, The image information transferred by the transmission control means is image information not held in the third image storage means, and the image information transferred to the third image storage means by the control of the second transfer control means includes: Power-on image information used for drawing an image to be displayed on the image display means when the gaming machine is starting up by power-on is included, and the second transfer control means includes the power-on image. Information is controlled so as to be transferred from the first image storage means to the third image storage means first in the image information to be transferred to the third image storage means, When image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the third image storage means by the second transfer control means, the image information read from the first image storage means is written to the third image storage means. before Transfer image storage means for temporarily storing, wherein the second transfer control means, when transferring the power-on image information to the third image storage means, the transfer image storage means to the transfer image storage means The temporary writing of the power-on image information is not executed, and the power-on image information is controlled to be directly transferred from the first image storage means to the third image storage means. When transferring image information other than that to the third image storage means, the image information read from the first image storage means is temporarily stored in the transfer image storage means and stored in the transfer image storage means. Since the control is performed so that the image information thus transferred is transferred to the third image storage means, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing | casing. It is an arrangement | sequence diagram which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a winning aspect, the stop symbol corresponding to the winning aspect, a winning probability, and a medal payout number. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a three-sheet lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a two-sheet lottery table, and (c) is one sheet. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of a lottery table at the time of hanging. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the scanning area | region of the screen which an auxiliary | assistant display part has, and the display area where an image is actually displayed on the screen. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery table setting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the display main process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the start command process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result command process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the back C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is. (A) is the flowchart which showed the frame button operation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the comparison process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 21, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a rotating game machine which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine 10 will be described. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. 2 is a front view of a body 11. FIG.

  In the slot machine 10, when a player inserts a medal as a game medium from the medal insertion slot 45 and operates the start lever 41, the three reels 32L, 32M, and 32R with a plurality of symbols are rotated. When the player operates stop switches 42, 43, 44 provided corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. When the combination of symbols displayed by stopping is a predetermined combination, a privilege for giving a predetermined number of medals or a privilege for shifting to a gaming state is given to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed in a box shape with the front face opened as a whole by combining wooden panels, and is attached by, for example, nailing a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall. The casing 11 may be composed of a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel in addition to being composed of a wooden panel, or may be composed of a synthetic resin material or a metal material formed into an integral box shape. Also good.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 has a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. The front door 12 can be opened and closed by rotating the front door 12 so as to be movable.

  Moreover, the locking device 20 is provided in the back surface on the opposite side of the opening / closing axis | shaft of the front door 12, and the front door 12 is made into the locked state which cannot be opened by the locking device 20. A key cylinder 21 that is integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is the thin upper portion of the front door 12, and as a result, a versatile key cylinder 21 having a short overall length can be employed. In this embodiment, Omlock (registered trademark) having a high function of preventing unauthorized unlocking is used as the key cylinder 21.

  A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided above the center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 is formed with three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into a single display window.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two vertically by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper portion of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are disposed on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be individually rotated, that is, independently driven by the driving of each stepping motor. . For example, the stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is determined by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. In the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has made one rotation, a detection signal is output to the main controller 101 described later each time the reel is detected. Therefore, main controller 101 determines the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

  On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circular direction). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 5. For each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals, and three consecutive symbols among them are displayed on the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is configured to be visible at each of the upper, middle, and lower positions. Therefore, in order to switch the symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses / 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps the symbols visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, or displays the display window. It is possible to perform control to stop a predetermined symbol at a position where it can be visually recognized from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided. The start lever 41 is a lever that is pushed by a hand (the direction in which the player is pushed is not limited) when the player starts a game (game). The start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number of medals are inserted. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started at the same time (however, it is not necessary to be simultaneous).

  On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disposed immediately below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped.

  At this time, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, only the stop mode in which the reaching symbols that have reached the base point position (the lower positions of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R in this embodiment) are stopped as they are. In addition, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a four-slip pattern There are five patterns for the stop mode to stop after the stop. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to stop in a predetermined stop manner until the specified time (190 msec) elapses from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. It is possible to give the player an impression as if the symbol arrangement (hereinafter also referred to as “stop appearance”) that stops within a visible range from 26L, 26M, and 26R is determined by the player's operation. In addition, by adopting a configuration capable of sliding up to 4 symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning mode (see FIG. 7) described later that has won the lottery as much as possible within the specified time will be described later. While being able to stop on an effective line (refer FIG. 6), it can be made to avoid stopping the combination of the symbol corresponding to the winning mode which is not won by lottery on an effective line.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal path switching solenoid 46a. When the medal path switching solenoid 46a is not excited, the medal is guided to the discharge path 48, and when the medal path switching solenoid 46a is excited, the medal is selected. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  The storage passage 47 is provided with a inserted medal detection device (not shown) that detects the passage of the inserted medal. The output signal of the inserted medal detection device is input to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 counts the number of medals based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device. In addition, when the movement of the inserted medal (medal passing direction) is determined based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection apparatus, and the movement of the medal is different from the normal, the main control device 101 may clog the medal, It is determined that there is a possibility that fraud such as a medal is pulled out, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, an auxiliary display unit 65, etc., which will be described later, are configured to notify that a sensor error has occurred. Yes.

  The inserted medal detection device includes a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and a second inserted medal detection sensor configured by a photocoupler having a pair of light projecting portions and light receiving portions (each not shown) via medals passing therethrough. 45b (see FIG. 8). The first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are juxtaposed on the upstream side and the downstream side, respectively, in such a state that they are close enough to detect one passing medal at the same time. The detection sensors 45a and 45b are set to output a “Lo” signal when receiving light and a “Hi” signal when shielding light.

  When the medal inserted by the player is guided to the storage passage 47 side by the selector 46, the medal passes through the inserted medal detection device. At this time, first, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a disposed on the upstream side is first shielded and outputs a “Hi” signal, and then the second inserted medal detection sensor disposed on the downstream side. 45b becomes a light shielding state and outputs a “Hi” signal, and medals are simultaneously detected by the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. When the medal further advances downstream in the storage passage 47, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a disposed on the upstream side first enters a light receiving state and outputs a “Lo” signal. The second inserted medal detection sensor 45b disposed on the downstream side is in a light receiving state and outputs a “Lo” signal.

  That is, when a medal normally passes through the inserted medal detection device, the signal output from each inserted medal detection sensor 45a, 45b is first "Hi" by the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and then the second inserted medal. The detection sensor 45b becomes “Hi”. Then, after each inserted medal detection sensor 45a, 45b becomes “Hi”, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a becomes “Lo”, and finally the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b becomes “Lo”. In the main control device 101, when the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b change at such timing, it is determined that the medal has been inserted normally, and the number of inserted medals is counted. Up.

  On the other hand, when a medal is jammed while passing through the inserted medal sensor device, or when a medal is pulled out illegally, a signal output from the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b is a case where the medal passes normally. Change at different times. The main control device 101 monitors changes in signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, and if the change is different from the change when the medal normally passes through the inserted medal detection device, It is determined that clogging or fraud has occurred, and the occurrence of a sensor error is notified to the display control device 81 described later by an error command. In the display control device 81, when the occurrence of a sensor error is notified from the main control device 101, the occurrence of the sensor error is notified from the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like.

  The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to a player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medal to the opening 48 a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, a reserve tank 54 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 51 to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored more than the height at which the guide plate 52 a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank 54.

  A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically operated, and the medal jammed in the selector 46 is medaled. It is returned from the discharge port 49.

  A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the checkout switch 59 is operated under the current situation, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as an actual medal.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is provided a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the number of remaining medals to be paid out before the bonus state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display parts 60-62 are comprised by the 7 segment display, it is naturally possible to substitute by a liquid crystal display etc. FIG.

  The upper part of the front door 12 has an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right sounds that produce various sound effects as the game progresses and inform the player of the gaming state. Speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 executes various display effects as the game progresses, and notifies the state when the power is turned on or when an error occurs. The auxiliary display unit 65 mainly plays games by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is referred to because it can be considered that the display unit is used. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65. Details of the display control device 81 will be described later with reference to FIG.

A lower plate 66 on which a model name, a character related to a game, and the like are displayed is mounted above the medal tray 50. In addition, an ashtray 69 that can be reversed to the lower side on the front side is provided on the left side of the medal tray 50.

  A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply device 91 (see FIG. 8), and includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 described later.

  The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. This slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from power failure (power recovery). It can be done. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is turned off in the normal procedure, such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and held. However, if the power switch 71 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 72, the backup data is reset ( Initialized). If the reset switch 72 is pressed while the power switch 71 is on, the error state is reset.

  The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the appearance of medals. That is, when the hole manager or the like inserts a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and rotates it, the setting state of the slot machine 10 (setting of the winning probability of each winning mode) is changed from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. ”Can be changed. When the setting state is set to “setting 1”, the lottery of the winning mode (role) is performed so that the expected value of the medal payout number is the lowest, and when the setting state is set to “setting 6”, The lottery of the winning mode is performed so that the expected value of the medal payout number is the highest. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the setting state of the slot machine 10.

  Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that manages and manages games is attached to the housing 11. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 8, but the main control device 101 includes an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 102 that controls the main control, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 105 that stores a game program, and the progress of the game. A random access memory (RAM) 106 that temporarily stores necessary data, a free-run counter 107 that generates random numbers, a port 104 that communicates with various devices, and a clock that is used for time counting and synchronization. A main substrate including the circuit 103 and the like is provided, and the main substrate is housed in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other by a sealing unit so as not to be opened, and thereby the substrate box is sealed. In addition, it is good also as a structure which connects a box base and a box cover so that opening is impossible using a key member.

  Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an arrangement diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers from 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. These numbers are symbols that are visible to the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Is a number for recognizing and not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As symbols, “7” symbol (for example, 20th of left reel 32L), “youth” symbol (for example, 19th of left reel 32L), “replay” symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), “ “Cherry” symbol (for example, 17th of left reel 32L), “Bell” symbol (for example, 16th of left reel 32L), “Watermelon” symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 32L), “Star” symbol (for example, There are 6 types of the middle reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 5, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

  Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that there are three symbols from which the entire symbol can be visually recognized out of the twenty-one symbols attached to the corresponding reel. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  In the slot machine 10, five combination lines are set so as to connect the positions where the symbols are visible. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the combination line set in the slot machine 10 will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R and the combination lines.

  6, the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, the upper symbol of the right reel 32R, the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, the right The middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M, the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the right reel 32R, the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle reel A lower right line L4 that connects the lower symbol of 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and a right upward line L5 that connects the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are set. ing. Then, when the combination line that has been activated, that is, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals are paid out is given as a winning combination, or a privilege that the gaming state is transferred It has come to be granted.

  The maximum number of combination lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5. Further, the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, a V (reverse V) -shaped line or an L-shaped line may be used as an effective line.

  Next, referring to FIG. 7, the winning mode that the slot machine 10 can take, the stop pattern on the active line where the winning is established in each winning mode, the winning probability of each winning mode in the general gaming state, The medal payout number when winning is established in the winning mode will be described. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode, the stop symbol, the winning probability in the general gaming state, and the medal payout number. In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set to “setting 1” will be described as an example. However, when the setting state is set to “setting 2” to “setting 6” In addition, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” while maintaining the magnitude relationship of each winning probability determined by each winning mode and the number of inserted medals (the number of bets). Each winning probability is set so as to increase.

  As shown in FIG. 7, there is a BB (Big Bonus) prize as a status transition prize that gives a player a privilege that the gaming status shifts. When the “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line, a privilege to shift the gaming state to a bonus state that is a special gaming state is given as a BB prize. However, even if the “7” symbol stops along the left, middle and right on the active line, no medal is paid out. That is, when the combination of the “7” symbols is established on the active line, only the bonus state is transferred. In other words, it can be said that the “7” symbol is a state transition symbol for shifting the gaming state to the bonus state.

  Here, the bonus state will be described. The bonus state is composed of a plurality of RB (Regular Bonus) states, and the RB state is composed of 12 JAC games. The JAC game is a game in which the probability of winning a watermelon prize and a bell prize, which will be described later, which is a small part prize, is very high compared to the general gaming state. If the winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. Further, the bonus state ends when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number (250 in this embodiment). That is, when the BB winning is established, the medal payout number at that time is 0, but when the gaming state of the gaming machine is shifted to the bonus state in accordance with the BB winning, 250 medals are given to the player. It is ensured that the payout is made with a smaller number of medals than in the general gaming state. In addition, when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number during the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state ends. This is a contrivance for suppressing the player's euphoria by giving an upper limit to the number of medals to be paid out in the bonus state and ensuring the soundness of the game. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of symbols that shift to the RB state is not set, and the configuration shifts to the RB state immediately after the transition to the bonus state and immediately after the RB state ends. Therefore, it can be said that the bonus state is a game that continuously shifts to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

  This slot machine 10 corresponds to the number of medals inserted at the start of the game (the number of bets) by one, two, or three, and the winning probability of BB winning in the general gaming state (BB winning in one game) Is set differently according to the number of medals inserted at the start of the game (the number of bets). Specifically, the probability of winning the BB prize is set to 1/65536 in the case of 1 and 2 and the setting is 1/256 in the case of 3. As described above, the winning probability of the BB winning in the general gaming state is set to be lower than the case of three cards when the number of cards is one or two.

  Next, as a small role winning in which medals are paid out, there are a watermelon winning and a bell winning. If you stop alongside the "Watermelon" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, or "Watermelon" symbol from the left on the active line, a watermelon prize will be established, and the "Bell" symbol, "Bell" symbol, " If you stop alongside the “Bell” symbol, you will receive a Bell prize. Then, when the game is executed with three cards, 12 medals are paid out when a watermelon winning is established, and 6 medals are paid out when a bell winning is established. In addition, when the game is executed with one or two sheets, if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of winning a watermelon in the general gaming state is set to 1/65536 in the case of 1 and 2 sheets, and is set to 1/8 in the case of 3 sheets. On the other hand, the winning probability of the bell winning in the general gaming state is set to 1/65536 for the case of 1 and 2 and is set to 1 / 5.1 for the case of 3s. In this way, the watermelon prize and the bell prize are set so that those prizes are easily established in the case of three sheets, while in the case of one and two sheets, those prizes are rarely established. It is set not to.

  On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, a special small role winning is prepared that is realized only when the game is executed with one or two cards, or only when the game is executed with one card. . Special child role winning includes Cherry Bell winning and 7 Bell winning. Among these, the Cherry Bell prize is a special small part prize that is only established when one or two cards are used. The “Cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L and the “Bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M are on the effective line. It is established in the case of stopping at 3 and 3 medals are paid out. Also, the 7-bell winning is a special small role winning that is established only when the number of cards is 1 and when the “7” symbol of the left reel 32L and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped on the active line. As a result, two medals are paid out.

  Here, the symbols that stop on the effective line of the right reel 32R for both the Cherry Bell winning and the 7 Bell winning may be any symbols. In addition, when the game is executed with three cards, the Cherry Bell winning a prize even if the “watermelon” or “7” symbol of the left reel 32L and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped on the effective line. Alternatively, it is determined that a 7-bell prize has not been established and that it has been missed. Similarly, when the game is executed with two cards, even if the “7” symbol of the reel 32L and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M stop on the active line, the 7-bell winning is not established. Judged as out. If the game is executed with three cards, the cherry winning symbol is not stopped at the same time on the effective line without stopping the “cherry” or “7” symbol on the left reel 32L and the “bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M. Alternatively, a 7-bell prize may not be established. Similarly, when the game is executed with two cards, the “7” symbol of the left reel 32L and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the active line at the same time so that the cherry prize is not established. You may comprise.

  The probability of winning the Cherry Bell in the general gaming state is set to about 1 / 6.0 when the number is 1 and about 1 / 1.8 when the number is 2. In addition, the winning probability of winning 7 bells in the general gaming state is set to about 1 / 6.0 for only one card.

  Now, in a conventional slot machine, when a game is executed with one or two cards, the probability that various benefits are granted is extremely low as compared with the case where the game is executed with three cards. There is a three-seat dedicated machine that can be set, or cannot play a game with one or two cards and can only play a game with three cards. This is made as a device for increasing the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall, and aims to allow the player to play one game with three medals as much as possible.

  However, since the number of medals lent out from the hall before the game is not necessarily a multiple of 3, it is generally rented in units of 50, so it is highly probable that the number of medals is less than 3 There was a possibility of remaining. And if there are fewer than three medals, you can't play a game with the remaining medals on a three-seat dedicated machine, and you can hang one or two However, since the probability of granting a privilege is low, there is a risk that a medal is left in the hall or the player leaves the remaining medal. If a medal is left in the hall, the player loses by the value of the medal, and if the player brings back the remaining medal, the medal lent out in the hall cannot be collected, and the game There is also a problem that a player may play a game using a medal brought back from another hall, and the hall side suffers damage.

  On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, when a game is played with two cards, a Cherry Bell winning is established with a high probability of about 1 / 1.8, and when a game is played with one card The Cherry Bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1 / 6.0, and three medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when one or two medals remain in the player's hand even if the winning probability of the BB winning in the case of one or two is extremely low In addition, it is possible to cause the player to execute the game with one or two cards while giving a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell prize will be established in which three medals are paid out. If the result of this game is a Cherry Bell winning, three medals are paid out, and the player uses the three medals under conditions that are more advantageous than one or two. The game can be played with a sense of expectation that a BB prize will be won. Further, even if the game is out of play, the game can be completed without leaving extra medals for the player.

  In addition, when a game is played with one card, a 7-bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1 / 6.0, and two medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when one medal remains at the player's hand, two medals are paid out together with a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell winning will be achieved in which three medals will be paid out. It is possible to cause a player to execute a game by multiplying one while giving a sense of expectation that a 7-bell prize will be established. If the result of this game is that a 7-bell prize is established, two medals are paid out, and the player uses the two medals to make a Cherry Bell prize where another three medals are paid out. You can enjoy the game with the expectation of being won.

  In this way, even if one or two medals remain at the player's hand, the one or two medals will be used and three medals will be paid out. A player can be caused to play a game aiming for a 7-bell prize where medals are paid out. Therefore, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without surplus.

  Here, referring again to FIG. 5, the “cherry” symbol, the “7” symbol, and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M in the reels 32L and 32M of the left reel 32L in which the cherry bell winning and the seven bell winning are established. The arrangement position will be briefly described.

  First, in the left reel 32L, the “cherry” symbols are arranged such that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next is 7 symbols. For example, the 3rd “cherry” symbol and the 10th “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the interval is 7 symbols. Since the reels No. 0 and No. 20 are actually arranged adjacent to each other, the interval between the 17th “cherry” symbol and the 3rd “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L is 7 symbols. ing. On the other hand, the symbol “7” is also arranged in the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next is 7 symbols. For example, the 6th “7” symbol on the left reel 32L and the 13th “7” symbol are arranged so that the interval is 7 symbols, and the 20th “7” symbol on the left reel 32L The 6th “7” symbol is arranged so that its interval is 7 symbols.

  Thus, both the “cherry” symbol and the “7” symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 7 symbols. As described above, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding for a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, by adopting such a symbol arrangement, the “Cherry” symbol or the “7” symbol can be used when the Cherry Bell winning or 7 Bell winning is established, regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated. The display window 26L can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions.

  For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the third “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the “cherry” symbol is stopped at the lower stage if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 4th “replay” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the 10th “ The “cherry” symbol can be stopped in the upper stage, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the fifth “bell” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the left reel 32L is slid by four symbols. If it stops later, the number 10 “cherry” symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 6th “7” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower level, the “7” symbol is stopped at the lower level if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the No. 7 “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the No. 13 “No. 7 ”symbol can be stopped in the upper stage, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number 8“ replay ”symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If stopped later, the 13th “7” symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, the “bell” symbol is arranged so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next symbol is 5 symbols or less. For example, the “bell” symbol of No. 0 and the “bell” symbol of No. 5 on the middle reel 32M are arranged so that the interval is 5 symbols, and the “bell” symbol of the ninth reel 32M is arranged. And the 12th “bell” symbol are arranged so that the interval is three symbols. In this way, the “bell” symbol is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between the symbols of the same type is 5 symbols or less. By adopting such a symbol arrangement, the middle stop switch 43 can be operated at any timing. Even in such a case, the “bell” symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M when the Cherry Bell winning or the 7 Bell winning is established.

  For example, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 11th “7” symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower level, the “bell” symbol is stopped at the middle level if the middle reel 32M is stopped as it is. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 12th “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, the middle reel 32M can be stopped after sliding the middle reel 32M for four symbols and then the number “17”. The “bell” symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  In this way, regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 42 and 43 are operated, the “cherry” symbol or the “7” symbol can be stopped in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the display window 26L. In addition, a “bell” symbol can be displayed in the middle of the display window 26M. Therefore, if a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize is won in the prize drawing lottery, it corresponds to a stop symbol corresponding to the Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player. Since the stop symbol can be displayed on any one of the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 (see FIG. 6), the so-called Cherry Bell prize or the 7 bell prize can be established without being missed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. As other winning modes that the slot machine 10 can take, a replay winning that is established when the “replay” symbol, the “replay” symbol, and the “replay” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line is provided. When the replay winning is established, the medal payout and the state transition are not performed, but the player can play the next game without reducing the medals owned and without inserting medals. Therefore, when a replay winning is achieved, the medals are paid out for the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted in the game, that is, 1 for 1 and 2 for 3 and 2 for 3 In this case, it can be considered that three medals are paid out. Note that the probability of winning a replay winning in the general gaming state is not limited to the number of medals inserted (the number of bets), and it is as high as about 1 / 7.3 in the case of 1-, 2-, 3- Set to probability. If this replay prize is established with a high probability, a special small role prize (Cherry Bell prize or 7 bell prize) will be established if a BB prize or a game with one or two cards is played. A lot of sense of challenge can be given to the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the “replay” symbols for establishing the replay winning are each reels 32L, 32M so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next is 5 symbols or less. , 32R. For example, the 8th “replay” symbol and the 11th “replay” symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the interval is 3 symbols, and the 1st “replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M and 6 The “replay” symbols of the numbers are arranged so that the interval is 5 symbols. As described above, the “replay” symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the interval between the symbols of the same type is 5 symbols or less. As described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In any case, the “replay” symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R when the replay winning is established. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 3rd “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower level, the 4th “replay” symbol is stopped in the middle level if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the first “replay” symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, the middle reel 32M is slipped by four symbols and then stopped. The “replay” symbol can be stopped in the middle. Therefore, when the replay winning is won, the “replay” symbol can be stopped at the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6) regardless of the timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 being operated. Therefore, a replay winning can be established without so-called losing.

  In other cases, that is, when the combination of symbols described above on the active line does not stop, the medal payout or the game state transition is not performed at all, and the game goes off. That is, the “youth” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the “cherry” symbol on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the “star” symbol on the middle reel 32M are not involved in any winnings. In other words, it can be said that each of the symbols is a no-benefits symbol unrelated to the privilege given to the player. That is, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided with a bonus symbol related to winning such as a “bell” symbol and a non-privileged symbol irrelevant to winning such as a “young” symbol, for example. In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols. For example, the BB symbol combination is a symbol BB winning combination, that is, a combination of “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol.

  As described above, in this slot machine 10, the probability of winning a BB prize when a game is played with three medals inserted is sufficiently higher than when the game is played with one or two medals inserted. Since it is set, the player can expect to receive a lot of medals when the BB winning is established, and can play one game by inserting three medals. As a result, medals are consumed quickly, and the utilization rate of the slot machine in the hall can be increased.

  On the other hand, if a game is played with one or two medals inserted, a Cherry Bell winning prize with three medal payouts is set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is set high. 1 or 2 medals remaining at hand while expecting the player to get 3 medals paid out when the Cherry Bell prize is established if 1 or 2 medals remain at the player's hand Can be entered to play a single game. Thus, if three medals are paid out due to the Cherry Bell winning, the player can play another game while inserting the three medals and expecting the BB winning. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is out of date, the game can be ended without leaving extra medals for the player. Thus, the slot machine 10 can entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals to the player. And the problem that the player loses by ending the game without using the lent medal, the player can not collect the medals lent out by bringing back the remaining medals, or brought it back from another hall By using the medal by the player, it is possible to avoid the problem that the hall side is damaged.

  Also, when a game is played with one medal inserted, a 7-bell winning prize with two medal payouts is also set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is also set high. Once a medal is left in the game, if the 7-bell prize is established, the player will expect to receive 2 medals, and once the remaining medal is inserted, The game can be played. As a result, when two medal payouts are made due to the completion of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell prize to be completed, in which three more medal payouts are made. , You can enjoy another game. If the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting three medals that are paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established. You can enjoy the medals and you can use up your medals even if you miss. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals while giving the player more enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in the lottery of the winning mode, when a Cherry Bell prize where three medals are paid out or a 7 bell prize where two medals are paid out is won, regardless of the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Because the stop pattern can be stopped on the active line without missing, as a result of the lottery of the game that the player started with one or two, the Cherry Bell winning or 7 Bell winning was won as the winning role In such a case, it is possible to reliably establish those winnings without depending on an artificial operation. In addition, the game can be played in anticipation of the establishment of a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize while aiming for other prizes (for example, a BB prize).

  Here, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in the general gaming state in the case of one-sheet and two-sheet game will be described. First, in the case of playing one card, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the watermelon winning and the bell winning is set to 1/65536, and if any winning is achieved, 3 medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning is set to about 1 / 6.0, respectively, and when the cherry bell winning is achieved, three pieces, when the 7 bell winning is achieved Two medals will be paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general game state of the replay winning is set to about 1 / 7.3, and when the replay winning is achieved, as described above, it is equivalent to the case where one medal has been paid out. Can think. On the other hand, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the BB winning is set to 1/65536, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, but the medal payout number is zero. Here, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game under the general gaming state is equal to the value obtained by multiplying the number of medals paid out corresponding to each winning probability and adding the multiplication results. Expected value is about 0.96. That is, in the general gaming state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out with respect to the number of bets (one) is about 96%, and it is expected that the number of medals owned by the player decreases by about 0.04 for every game played. .

  In addition, in the case of two cards, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the watermelon winning and the bell winning is set to 1/65536, and when any winning is achieved, 3 medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general game state of the Cherry Bell winning is set to about 1 / 1.8, and when the Cherry Bell winning is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general game state of the replay winning is set to about 1 / 7.3, and when the replay winning is established, as described above, it is equivalent to the case where two medals are paid out. Can think. On the other hand, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the BB winning is set to 1/65536, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, but the medal payout number is zero. Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game under the general gaming state with two cards is about 1.94. In other words, in the general gaming state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (2) is about 97%, and it is expected that the medals owned by the player will decrease by about 0.06 for every game played. .

  As described above, in both cases of 1 and 2 sheets, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is set to a value close to 100%, so that a gaming machine can be used with 1 or 2 sheets. In this case, the medal is returned to the player with an expected value of almost 100%. In other words, even if a game is played with one or two cards, the medals will hardly decrease, so if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player will have one remaining Or you can make sure that you want to play a game using two medals. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the player will leave the medal and finish the game.

  On the other hand, if the game is played with 1 or 2 cards, it is expected that the number of medals will decrease slightly, so if you repeat the game with 1 or 2 cards, the number of medals will increase. Instead, it has been reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming for an increase in medals by repeatedly playing the game with one or two. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with three cards having a high probability of winning a BB prize.

  In this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out is set to 3 which is the maximum bet number when the game is played with one or two cards and the Cherry Bell winning is established, and the game is performed with one card. The number of medals to be paid out when the 7-bell prize is established is set to 2, but the number of medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell prize is established is set to a multiple of 3, and the number of medals to be paid out when the 7-bell prize is established. It may be set to a multiple of 2. However, if the number of payouts is set to 3 or 2 when the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is established, even if the expected value of the medal payout number is set to less than 100%, The winning probability can be set high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established and to increase the probability that three or two medals will be given to the player. You can make me want to play a game using medals.

  In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state is “setting 1” is shown, but even if the setting state is set to any of “setting 2” to “setting 6”, one win and The winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of two is set so that the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is less than 100%. In the present embodiment, the winning probabilities corresponding to each winning mode in the case of 1 and 2 are changed according to the setting state ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6"). The winning probability of multiplying and two sheets may be constant regardless of the setting state. In other words, the winning probability may be changed according to the set state only in the case of three sheets. In addition, in the case of 1- and 2-seats, the winning probability of at least one of BB winning, watermelon winning, bell winning and replay winning according to the setting state ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6") Although changed, the winning probabilities of the Cherry Bell winning and 7 Bell winning, which are special small role winning in the case of 1 and 2 wins, are not changed and may be fixed values.

  In addition, in this slot machine 10, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells. When the game is played with three cards, the left reel 32L Even if the “Cherry” symbol is stopped and the “Bell” symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, the Cherry Bell prize will not be established and will be handled as a detachment. It is possible to draw attention to the player as a winning prize. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol stops at the cherry bell winning stop symbol, the player can be given great joy.

  Similarly, the winning mode is established only when a 7-bell winning game is played with one card, and when the game is played with two or three cards, a “7” symbol is displayed on the left reel 32L. Even if the “bell” symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, the 7-bell prize will not be established and will be handled as a detachment. It can be noticed. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece, if the symbol stops at the stop symbol of 7-bell winning, a great joy can be given to the player.

  Also, in the present slot machine 10, even when a game is played with one or two cards, the BB winning is set although the winning probability is very low. Thereby, even when a game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a BB prize will be established.

  In the slot machine 10, when a game is played with one or two cards, a watermelon prize or a bell prize, which is a normal small prize other than a BB prize or a replay prize, is established. Also, unlike the medal payout number when the game is played with 3 cards, 3 medal payouts are made as in the case of the Cherry Bell winning, so that payout 3 medals are inserted and the player can play another game while expecting the BB prize to be established, and the player can surely enjoy the game without leaving any extra medals. it can. In the slot machine 10, the probability of winning a watermelon or a bell is reduced when a game is played with one or two cards, while the probability of winning a cherry bell or a seven bell is set high. As a result, the player can be further impressed by the fact that the Cherry Bell or 7-Bel prize is a special small part prize with one or two cards, and one or two cards. When a game is played, the player can have a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10.

  The main controller 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on the MPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the MPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects an operation of the start lever 41 are provided. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect operations of the stop switches 42 to 44, a first insertion medal detection sensor 45a and a second insertion medal detection sensor 45b that detect medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, A payout detection sensor 51a for detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 51; credit insertion detection sensors 56a to 58a for individually detecting operations of the respective credit insertion switches 56 to 58; Reset that detects the operation of the reset switch 72 Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that the setting key is inserted into the key detection sensor 72a and the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON are connected, and signals from these various sensors are input / output ports. The data is output to the MPU 102 via 104.

  A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power-off state and generates a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also when the power switch 71 powers off. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been shut off when this drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the MPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the MPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

  The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. As a time for outputting the stabilization voltage, a time sufficient for executing the power failure process by the main controller 101 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a medal path switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a display control device 81, an external concentration terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), and the like are connected via an input / output port 104. Yes.

  The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 10, but the MPU 181, the image controller 186, and a substrate on which various memories are integrated are provided, and display control is performed after receiving a signal from the main control device 101. The device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is a main board that manages and manages games. Various display units 60 to 62 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

  In the display control device 81, the character ROM 187 for storing various image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is constituted by a NAND flash memory which is a small area and has a large storage capacity and is an inexpensive memory. . Thus, the capacity of the character ROM 187 can be easily increased, and a large number of images can be prepared as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, in order to enhance the player's interest, the auxiliary display unit The images displayed on the screen can be diversified and complicated. Note that the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.), the display control device 81 has a memory with a slow reading speed. Even when image data is used as a storage means for image data, an invention has been made to display an image without any problem at a time when it is desired to be displayed. Details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The above-described MPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. A RAM 106 for securing and a free-run counter 107 for generating random numbers are incorporated. The MPU 102 also includes various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, and various counters such as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, as is well known. Built in.

  The free-run counter 107 is a counter configured by hardware that generates and updates random numbers from 0 to 65535 in a short cycle. After confirming the operation of the start lever 41 based on the output signal of the start detection sensor 41a, the MPU 102 latches the value of the free-run counter 107 by a hardware circuit and stores the latched value in the RAM 106. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter 107 each time the start lever 41 is operated. The value of the free-run counter latched and stored in the RAM 106 is used to draw a winning mode (combination) of a game started by operating the start lever 41.

  The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and a program for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 12 and subsequent figures is stored in the ROM 105 as a part of the control program. The ROM 105 is provided with at least a lottery table storage area 105a for storing a lottery table used for lottery in a winning mode.

  Here, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lottery table selected in the general gaming state when the setting state is set to “setting 1”. FIG. 9A shows three inserted medals. (3) Multi-drawing lottery table used when (3), (b) is a 2-ply lottery table used when the number of inserted medals is 2 (2), (c) is The drawing shows a 1-sheet drawing lottery table used when the number of inserted medals is 1 (1).

  Each lottery table is set with an index value IV, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning mode for winning, and a point value corresponding to the winning probability corresponding to the winning mode. PV is set for each lottery table. Specifically, BB winning is associated with IV = 1 as a winning mode, Watermelon winning is associated with IV = 2, Bell winning is associated with IV = 3, and IV = 4. Is associated with a cherry bell prize, IV = 5 is associated with a 7-bell prize, and IV = 6 is associated with a replay prize.

  Also, in the three-sheet drawing lottery table, as shown in FIG. 9A, PV = 256 is associated with IV = 1 (BB winning), and PV = 256 with IV = 2 (watermelon winning). 8192 is associated, PV = 12850 is associated with IV = 3 (bell prize), PV = 0 is associated with IV = 4 (cherry prize), and IV = 5 (7 bell prize). ) Is associated with PV = 0, and IV = 6 (replay prize) is associated with PV = 8980.

  Here, the lottery method of the winning mode will be briefly described. When the random number value of the free-run counter 107 is latched by the operation of the start lever 41 and stored in the RAM 106, first, the value of the point value PV associated with IV = 1 (BB winning) (FIG. 9A). In the lottery table shown in FIG. 14, 256) is added to the value of the latched random number, which is used as the determination value DV (see S304 in FIG. 14). If the determination value DV is larger than 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination of the game (see S305 and S306 in FIG. 14), and the lottery is ended. That is, when a lottery is performed using the three-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, when the latched random number value is in the range of 655280 to 65535, the BB winning prize is determined as the winning combination. . Therefore, the winning probability is set to 1/256 as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the determination value DV is 65535 or less, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (see S307 in FIG. 14), and the value of the point value PV corresponding to the value of the index value IV after the increase is added to the determination value DV. Then, the determination value DV is updated (see S304 in FIG. 14). If the updated determination value DV is larger than 65535, the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV after the advance is determined as a winning combination, and the lottery is completed. Further, the index value IV is incremented by 1 to update the determination value DV (addition of the point value PV corresponding to the IV after the advancement), and determination of the updated determination value DV (whether the determination value DV is larger than 65535). ) Is repeated until the winning combination is determined or until there is no determined combination (IV exceeds the maximum value) (see S304 to S308 in FIG. 14).

  Accordingly, when a lottery is performed using the three-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the watermelon winning is determined as a winning combination when the latched random number value is in the range of 57088 to 655279, When the value of the latched random number is in the range of 44238 to 57087, the Bell winning combination is determined as a winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 35258 to 44237, the winning of the replay is determined as a winning combination. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/8 for the watermelon winning, is set to about 1 / 5.1 for the Bell winning, and is approximately set for the replay winning. It will be set to 7.3.

  In the three-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 (Cherry Bell winning) and IV = 5 (7 Bell winning) is set to 0. Therefore, even if the determination value DV is updated using this value, the value does not change before and after the update. When the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 and IV = 5 is added to the determination value DV, since the determination value DV is 65535 or less, when IV = 4 and IV = 5 Even if the determination value after the update is determined, it is not determined to be larger than 65535. Therefore, by setting the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 (Cherry Bell prize) and IV = 5 (7 Bell prize) to 0, the Cherry Bell prize and the 7 Bell prize are not selected as the winning combination. It has become.

  In the two-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 1 (BB winning), and PV = 1 is associated with IV = 2 (watermelon winning). , IV = 3 (Bell Winner) is associated with PV = 1, IV = 4 (Cherry Bell Winner) is associated with PV = 36400, and IV = 5 (7 Bell Winner) is PV. = 0 and PV = 8980 is associated with IV = 6 (replay winning). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the two-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, when the value of the latched random number is 65535, the BB winning is determined as a winning combination, and the latched random number When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random value is 65533, the bell winning is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number is within the range of 29133 to 65532. At some point, the Cherry Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is within the range of 15153 to 29132, the replay winning combination is determined as the winning combination. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/65536 for the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, and is approximately 1 / 1.8 for the cherry bell winning. The replay winning is set to about 1 / 7.3. Since the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV = 5 (7-bell winning) is set to 0, as described above, the 7-bell winning is not set as a winning combination.

  Further, in the one-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 1 (BB prize), and PV = 1 is associated with IV = 2 (watermelon prize). PV = 1 is associated with IV = 3 (Bell Prize), PV = 10880 is associated with IV = 4 (Cherry Bell Prize), and IV = 5 (7 Bell Prize). PV = 10880 is associated, and PV = 8980 is associated with IV = 6 (replay winning). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the one-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, when the value of the latched random number is 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination, and the random number of the latched random number When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is 65533, the bell winning is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number value is in the range of 54653-65532. At some time, the Cherry Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is in the range of 43773 to 54652, the 7 Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number value is 34793-43772. When it is within the range, the replay winning is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/65536 for the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, respectively, and about 6.0 for the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning. It is set to 1 / minute, and the replay winning is set to about 1 / 7.3.

  In the lottery table storage area 105a, for each “setting 1” to “setting 6”, a one-hatch lottery table, a two-hatch lottery table, and a three-hatch lottery table for the general gaming state are stored. Yes. Also, a bonus state lottery table used when the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state is prepared for each of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Then, a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning mode (combination) is set according to the setting state and gaming state of the slot machine 10 and the number of inserted medals (number of bets). That is, when the number of bets is three in the general gaming state, a three-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set, and when the number of bets is two, When a two-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state is set and the number of bets is one, a one-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. When the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a bonus state lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set (see FIG. 15). Then, using the set lottery table, a lottery of a winning mode is performed.

  Note that, as the lottery table used when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a different lottery table is not provided according to the number of bets (1 to 3). This is because the game is played with the number of bets being limited to three in the state. Therefore, in the bonus state, the corresponding bonus state lottery table is simply set according to the setting state (“Setting 1” to “Setting 6”) of the slot machine 10.

  In this slot machine 10, when in the general gaming state, the three-hatch lottery table, the two-hatch lottery table, and the one-hatch lottery table shown in FIGS. BB winning prize probability when the game is played with three medals inserted can be set sufficiently higher than when the game is played with one or two medals inserted. . Therefore, as described above, it is possible to have one player play a game by inserting three medals while expecting the player to obtain a lot of medals when the BB winning is established. As a result, medals are consumed quickly, and the utilization rate of the slot machine in the hall can be increased.

  In addition, when a game is played by inserting one or two medals, it is possible to set a Cherry Bell winning prize with three medal payouts as a winning combination candidate, and to further increase the winning probability. Therefore, if one or two medals remain at the player's hand, the player expects the player to get three medals when the Cherry Bell prize is established, while the one or two remaining at hand. A single game can be played by inserting medals. Thus, if three medals are paid out due to the Cherry Bell winning, the player can play another game while inserting the three medals and expecting the BB winning. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is out of date, the game can be ended without leaving extra medals for the player.

  In addition, when a game is played by inserting one medal, a 7-bell winning prize with two medal payouts can be set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability can be set higher. If one medal remains in the player's hand and the player expects the player to get two medals if the 7-bell prize is established, the player will throw in the remaining medal. Can be played once. As a result, when two medal payouts are made due to the completion of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell prize to be completed, in which three more medal payouts are made. , You can enjoy another game. If the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting three medals that are paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established. You can enjoy the medals and you can use up your medals even if you miss. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals while giving the player more enjoyment of the game.

  Thus, the slot machine 10 can entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals to the player.

  Further, by using the 1-sheet drawing lottery table or the 2-sheet drawing lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 105a, the winning probability of each winning mode can be set to the value shown in FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the ratio of the number of medals paid out with respect to the number of bets can be set to a value less than 100% and as close as possible to 100% in both cases of 1 and 2 sheets. it can. Therefore, even if a game is played with one or two cards, the medals will hardly decrease, so if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player will have one remaining in the hand Alternatively, it is possible to reliably make a player want to play a game using two medals, and the possibility that the player leaves the medal and finishes the game can be further reduced. On the other hand, if the game is repeated with one or two cards, the number of medals decreases, so the player can increase the medal by repeating the game with one or two cards. It can be made not to aim. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, it is possible to direct the player to play the game with three pieces having a high probability of winning a BB prize.

  In addition, by switching and using each lottery table according to the number of bets, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells. If it is done, it can be handled as a miss without establishing a Cherry Bell prize, so pay attention to the player as the Cherry Bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one or two. Can be made. Similarly, a winning mode that is established only when a 7-bell prize is played with a single game is used, and a 7-bell prize is not established when a game is played with two or three cards. Since it is handled as a detachment, it is possible to draw attention to the player, assuming that the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol stops with the cherry bell winning symbol or the seven bell winning symbol, a great joy can be given to the player.

  In addition, even if the game is played with one or two cards, it can be set so that a BB winning is achieved although the winning probability is very low. Even when a game is played, the player can have a sense of expectation that a BB prize will be established.

  In the slot machine 10, the probability of winning a watermelon or a bell winning when a game is played with one or two is reduced, while the probability of winning a cherry bell or seven bell is set high. It is possible to give the player a further impression that the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize with one or two cards, and one or two cards. When a game is played by hanging, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established.

  In this embodiment, the point value PV corresponding to IV = 5 (7-bell winning) is set to 0 in the 2-sheet lottery table, and IV = 4 (Cherry Bell winning in the 3-sheet lottery table. ) And IV = 5 (7-bell winning), by setting the point value PV to 0, the winning mode is selected, while the winning mode is not selected, but the winning mode is selected. It is good also as a structure which does not win the said winning aspect by not setting the index value IV which becomes and not performing the lottery of those winning aspects.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 106 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. In the RAM 106, a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of a combination, and a sliding table used when stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In addition to the slide table storage area 106b for storing the game information, the status information storage area 106c for storing the gaming status such as the bonus status, etc., at least a backup area is provided.

  The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including power shutdown by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power-off based on the backup area information. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut off by the power failure process (see S103 in FIG. 12), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

  Further, the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 102 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is shut off, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 81 of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 81. In the description of FIG. 10, the detailed description of the portions described in the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of FIG. 8 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65, and a microcomputer centering on the MPU 181 that is arithmetic processing means, An image controller 188 for drawing and displaying the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, and a character ROM 187 storing image data displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are mounted.

  The MPU 181 is connected to an input / output port 186, a character ROM 187, and an image controller 188 via an internal bus, and a signal latch circuit 182 that latches a control signal such as a command transmitted from the main controller 101, and a predetermined A clock circuit 183 that outputs a rectangular wave having a frequency, a program ROM 184 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 181 and fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63, and the like, and is stored in the program ROM 184. A work RAM 185 for securing a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program is connected. Note that a one-chip microcomputer in which the program ROM 184, the work RAM 185, the signal latch circuit 182 and the clock circuit 183 described above are built in the MPU may be used.

  The MPU 181 is connected to a power supply device 91, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 via an input / output port 186. The power supply device 91 is configured to receive a power failure signal that is output when the drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Further, the MPU 181 performs various control processes based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 101, and executes drive control of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 via the input / output port 186. . Hereinafter, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are collectively referred to as an auxiliary effect unit.

  The work RAM 185 is provided with at least a received command storage area 185a and a bet number storage area 185b. The received command recording area 185a is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 101. When the display control device 81 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 latches the received command by the signal latch circuit 182 and generates a command interrupt signal toward the MPU 181. The MPU 181 executes command interrupt processing (not shown) triggered by the generation of the command interrupt signal, and stores the command latched by the signal latch circuit 182 in the received command storage area 185a. The received command storage area 185a is configured to operate as a FIFO (First In First Out) type ring buffer, and a command received from the main controller 101 is received in the received command storage area 185a by main processing executed by the MPU 181. If stored, the commands are read in the order in which they are stored, and processing corresponding to each command (for example, start command processing shown in FIG. 19, lottery result command processing shown in FIG. 20, error command processing shown in FIG. 21, etc.) ).

  The bet number storage area 185b is an area for storing information relating to the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted at the start of the game. In the slot machine 10, when a predetermined number of medals are inserted and the start lever 41 is operated by the player, the number of medals inserted (the number of bets) by a normal process executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101. A start command including information related to this is set (see S209 in FIG. 13), and the start command is transmitted from the main control apparatus 101 to the display control apparatus 81 by timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 (see FIG. 13). (See S110 in FIG. 12). By receiving this start command, the display control device 81 recognizes that the start lever 41 has been operated and a game start command has been generated, and executes a start command process (see FIG. 19). Information regarding the included bet number is extracted and stored in the bet number storage area 185b (see S801 in FIG. 19). In the bet number storage area 185b, information regarding the bet number included in the start command may be stored as it is, or information regarding the bet number may be stored in a format different from the information regarding the bet number included in the start command. You may make it store.

  In the display control device 81, based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the number of medals inserted at the start of the game (the number of bets) is grasped, and the auxiliary effect section is executed based on the bet number. Control the production mode. For example, when it is determined that the game is started with the number of bets being three based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the display control device 81 receives various commands received from the main control device 101. The production mode is selected based on the gaming state of the slot machine 10 determined by the determination and the result of the lottery (the determination of whether or not the winning mode is determined) based on the start command, and the auxiliary production unit executes various types of production (FIG. 20). S902).

  As an effect corresponding to the number of bets of three, for example, as a normal effect, a character that performs a predetermined action is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a “normal effect”, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is “Challenge BB prize!” The message “BB winning challenge production” is displayed to prompt the player to arrange the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode, and the message “BB winning selection!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the upper lamp A random number counter (not shown) prepared in the display control device 81 includes a lighting of 63 and an audio output from the speaker 64, and a “BB winning announcement effect” for notifying that the BB winning mode is set as a winning combination. )) And the result of lottery (judgment determination of winning combination) grasped by a lottery result command received from the main controller 101, which will be described later, received from the main controller 101. Depending on the game state of the slot machine 10 to be grasped by the state command, it determines the representation embodiment to be executed by the auxiliary rendering unit from among the rendition.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is started with the number of bets being one or two, the auxiliary control unit executes the result based on the result of the lottery performed based on the generation of the start command by the main control device 101. The production mode to be selected is selected. For example, it is determined that the number of bets is 1 and the Cherry Bell winning mode, 7 Bell winning mode or Replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or in which winning mode If it is determined that the player has not won, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the message “Challenge 7 bell challenge!” And output a dedicated sound from the speaker 64. The auxiliary effect section is controlled to execute “Cherry Bell Winning / 7 Bell Winning Challenge Effect” in which the upper lamp 63 is lit in a dedicated manner (see S911 in FIG. 20). In addition, it is determined that the number of bets is two and either the Cherry Bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or any winning mode is not won. If it is determined, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display a message “Challenge is a challenge!”, And causes the speaker 64 to output a dedicated sound, so that the upper lamp 63 is in a dedicated mode. The auxiliary effect section is controlled to execute “Cherry Bell winning challenge effect” to be lit (see S910 in FIG. 20).

  When a game is played with one card, the expectation that 3 or 2 medals will be paid out according to the establishment of the 1 Cherry Bell Award or 7 Bell Award Mode by "Cherry Bell Award / 7 Bell Award Challenge Direction" Can be strongly held by the player. In addition, when a game is played with two cards, the “Cherry Bell winning challenge production” can give the player a strong sense of expectation that three medals will be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning mode is established. . Therefore, the player can play the game with one or two cards while having fun, and can make the player strongly think that he wants to play the game without leaving an extra medal.

  It should be noted that the “Cherry Bell Award / 7 Bell Award Challenge Effect” and the “Cherry Bell Award Challenge Effect” may be effects produced in at least one of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. . Separately from these, a lamp is provided on the game panel 25. For example, when a single board is used, the lamp is lit red, and when two boards are used, the lamp is lit blue. May be configured to be executed.

  Further, when it is determined that the number of bets is one or two, if the BB winning mode is determined by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 displays the BB As an effect of notifying the player that the winning mode has been set as a winning combination, a “BB winning notification effect” for displaying the message “BB winning!” On the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed (see S904 in FIG. 20). ), If it is determined that the watermelon winning mode is won, the display control device 81 displays “watermelon winning” on the auxiliary display unit 65 as an effect to notify the player that the watermelon winning mode is set as a winning combination. “Watermelon winning announcement effect” that displays the message “Win!” Is executed (see S906 in FIG. 20), and if it is determined that the bell winning mode is won, the display control device 81 Then, as an effect of notifying the player that the bell winning mode has been set as a winning combination, a “Bell winning notification effect” is executed in which a message “Bell winning winning!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (FIG. 20). (See S908).

  Here, when the player starts the game with one or two cards, that is, when the number of bets is one or two, BB is determined according to the lottery table shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C. While the winning probability of the winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is suppressed to be extremely low, the winning probability of the Cherry Bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode is set high, so that the player can There is a high possibility of playing a game without expecting the formation of the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode, and conversely expecting the establishment of the cherry bell winning mode and the 7-bell winning mode. In addition, in the slot machine 10, the Cherry Bell winning mode and the 7 Bell winning mode are effective with the stop pattern corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, which are not missed at any timing once they are won as the winning combination. Since it is configured to stop on the line, the player who started the game with one or two is attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R displayed on the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. There is a high possibility of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 without looking at the symbols.

  Therefore, when a game is played with one or two cards, even if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as a winning role, and the player is not aware of it, Since the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all winning modes that may be missed, the BB winning mode and the like may be missed. In addition, the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the game until the BB winning mode is established (that is, until the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode are aligned on the effective line). If the player finishes the game without noticing the winning of the winning mode, another player establishes the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has won the winning of the BB winning mode As a result, there is a risk of loss.

  On the other hand, in the case where the game is played with one or two slots, the slot machine 10 has a BB winning mode, a watermelon winning mode, or a bell winning mode. Winning is notified by the display of the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, the notification is made while the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the player can know the winning of any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode. Therefore, when the player plays a game with one or two cards, if this notification is made by the auxiliary display unit 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning) grasped by the notification is obtained. Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol in order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the active line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. In addition, when the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, even if the player misses the game, the player can receive a new medal and continue the game until the BB winning mode is established. it can.

  The above notification may be made by turning on the upper lamp 63 or outputting sound from the speaker 64. Two or more kinds of display of the auxiliary display unit 65, turning on the upper lamp 63, and outputting sound from the speaker 64 may be performed. It may be performed by a combination. Further, a notification-dedicated lamp may be provided on the game panel 25, and a notification effect corresponding to each winning combination may be performed according to the lighting color of the lamp.

  As described above, the character ROM 187 is a memory that stores image data displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. An image controller 188 is also connected to the internal bus, and the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187 to transfer the image data stored in the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 connected to the image controller 188 or the normal use. It can be transferred to the video RAM 190.

  The character ROM 187 is composed of a NAND flash memory 187a. Since the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, the capacity of the character ROM 187 can be easily increased. For example, in the present slot machine, many images are stored as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes. Thereby, in order to raise a player's interest more, the image displayed on the auxiliary | assistant display part 65 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 187a has a defective data block in which data cannot be written due to its nature. Therefore, the character ROM 187 is provided with a known arbitration circuit 187b (see, for example, Patent Document 1) that performs data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 187a while avoiding a defective data block. Provided. The arbitration circuit 187b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 187a in the character ROM 187 and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 187 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the data block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 187 from becoming complicated.

  The image controller 188 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. Then, based on an instruction from the MPU 181, an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is drawn, and data (drawing image data) corresponding to the drawn image is input through the input / output port at a predetermined timing. Then, the drawing image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  A resident video RAM 189 and a normal video RAM 190 are connected to the image controller 188, and image data necessary for drawing an image by the image controller 188 is read out from the character ROM 187 in advance by the MPU 181 before drawing. It is transferred to the video RAM 189 for normal use or the video RAM 190 for normal use. At this time, the MPU 181 determines whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 (and to which address to store it) according to the contents of the image based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 184. To decide.

  When the image controller 188 draws an image, image drawing processing is executed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without using the image data in the character ROM 187. As a result, even if the character ROM 187 is configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the image controller 188 uses the image data stored in advance in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 from the character ROM 187. Since the drawing is performed, the image can be immediately drawn without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 187. Therefore, a desired image can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a desired time.

  The MPU 181 determines whether the image data required when the image controller 188 draws an image is stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 (and at which address) the MPU 181 stores the program ROM 184. Is determined according to the contents of the image based on the program or table stored in the image storage, and when the image controller 188 is instructed to draw the image, the necessary image data storage destination (resident video RAM 189 and normal video) Which address of the RAM 190 is stored and which address is stored). The image controller 188 reads necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 based on an instruction from the MPU 181. As a result, the image controller 188 does not need to determine the storage location where the necessary image data is stored, and thus can concentrate on drawing the image.

  When the image controller 188 receives an image drawing instruction from the MPU 181, the image data required for drawing is stored based on the type of image required for drawing (in the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190. It may be determined in which address it is stored and at which address it is stored. In this case, when the MPU 181 stores image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the image controller 188 displays the type of image (or corresponding image) displayed by the stored image data. The address of the character ROM 187 storing the data) and the storage location of the image data are determined based on the control signal from the MPU 181, and the image type (or corresponding) is stored in the RAM provided in the image controller 188. The address of the character ROM 187 storing the image data) and the storage destination of the image data may be stored in association with each other. Then, based on the information stored in the RAM, the image controller 188 may determine the storage location of the image data necessary for the image. By determining the image data storage destination by the image controller 188, the processing load on the MPU 181 can be reduced.

  The resident video RAM 189 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) having one input / output port (hereinafter referred to as “1-port type”), and image data transferred from the character ROM 187 is overwritten while the power is turned on. It is used so that it can be kept without being lost. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 189 is resident in the resident video RAM 189. In the resident video RAM 189, among the images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, the data corresponding to the frequently displayed image, and the main controller 101 Alternatively, data corresponding to an image to be displayed immediately among images determined to be displayed by the display control device 81 is transferred from the character ROM 187 and is resident.

  On the other hand, the normal video RAM 190 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is constituted by a one-port DRAM (Dynamic RAM). In the normal video RAM 190, when the image controller 188 draws an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 189, the image data read from the character ROM 187 in advance is drawn. Is for storing temporarily. Further, image data (drawn image data) drawn by the image controller 188 is also stored in a drawn image area (not shown) provided in the normal video RAM 190, and the image controller 188 matches the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. Thus, by transmitting the drawing image data stored in the drawing image area of the normal video RAM 190 to the auxiliary display unit 65, an image corresponding to the drawing image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  The resident video RAM 189 is provided with a power-on main image area 189a, a back image area 189b, a character symbol area 189c, a notification effect image area 189d, and an error message image area 189e.

  The power-on main image area 189a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 while the display control device 81 is performing initialization processing at power-on. The main image when the power is turned on is a message image for notifying a player or the like that initialization processing is being performed when the power is turned on, such as “Waiting for power! Please wait for a while”. Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

  In the display control device 81, when the power switch 71 is turned on and power is supplied from the power supply device 91 to the display control device 81, the MPU 181 accesses the character ROM 181 directly, and the character ROM 181 first corresponds to the main image when the power is turned on. Data is read out and transferred to the main image area 189a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 189 via a buffer RAM 188a described later provided in the image controller 188 (see S702 and S703 in FIG. 17). When the image data is stored in the power-on main image area 189a, the MPU 181 instructs the image controller 188 to draw the power-on main image (see S70 in FIG. 17). As a result, the image controller 188 draws the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 189 a and displays the drawn power-on main image on the auxiliary display unit 65. . Then, the main image at power-on is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

  Here, for initialization processing of the display control device 81, other image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 (image data other than the main image when the power is turned on) is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189. Processing is included (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). That is, since all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 after the power is turned on, the image controller 188 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189 after the initialization process. Image drawing processing. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 189 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, the responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player to displaying some image on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be kept high. it can.

  Further, immediately after the power is supplied, the display control device 81 transfers the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 189. After the input main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, control is performed so that the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed. After being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character RO187 to the resident video RAM 189. Continue to be.

  In this slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is resident from the character ROM 187 due to the slow reading speed. Although it takes a long time to be transferred to the video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, first, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is supplemented. Since the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189 after being displayed on the display unit 65 is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189. While being played, players and hall personnel , Main image when displayed power-on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored in the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189, so that when a power failure occurs instantaneously, the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 189. If the remaining data remains, the power-on main image can be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the power-on main image area 189a at the time of power recovery.

  The back image area 189b and the character design area 189c are areas for storing image data corresponding to back images and character designs used in various effects displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, respectively. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 6 such as a character design.

  In the display control device 81, when it is determined that the gaming state of the slot machine 10 shifts to a different gaming state (for example, from the normal state to the bonus state) based on the command received from the main control device 101, the back image and the character design are displayed. It is configured to change the back image and the character design when changing or performing various other effects, and the back image and the character design are required to change immediately according to the contents of the received command.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, image data corresponding to the back image and the character design is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization process performed in the display control device 81 when the power is turned on. Are transferred in advance to a back image area 189b and a character design area 189c through a later-described buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). When the display control device 81 changes the back image or the character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, but the resident video RAM 189. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 188 by reading out image data previously resident in the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, the back image and the character design can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 187.

  In the back image area 189b, image data corresponding to all back images may be resident, or image data corresponding to some back images may be resident. Further, when image data corresponding to a part of the back image is resident, at least data corresponding to the back image to be displayed immediately in response to a received command from the main control device 101 may be resident. As a result, when the back image is changed immediately upon receiving a reception command from the main control device 101, image data corresponding to the back image after the change is always resident in the back image area 189b. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  Further, when the rear image is scrolled and displayed over time, the image data corresponding to the entire range to be scrolled may be resident in the rear image area 189b, or within a predetermined time from the time when the rear image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed on the screen may be resident in the rear image area 189b. Further, for a predetermined back image such as a back image displayed after power-on, image data corresponding to the entire range to be scrolled is resident in the back image area 189b, and for another back image, a predetermined time from the time when the back image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within may be resident in the rear image area 189b. As a result, at least the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the time when the rear image is changed is resident in the rear image area 189b. Even in such a case, the image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data resident in the back image area 189 b and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  In addition, when changing to a rear image to be displayed by scrolling, it is more preferable to always start display from a fixedly set initial position as the position of the rear image displayed at the time of change. . As a result, the image data to be resident in the back image area 189b can be limited to the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the fixedly set initial position, and the data amount can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from when the rear image is changed resides in the rear image area 189b, the image data resident in the rear image area 189b by the image controller 188 is used. While the image is drawn and the drawn image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 reads out image data corresponding to the remaining scroll range from the character ROM 187 and transfers it to the normal video RAM 190. It may be.

  Thus, while the rear image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the scroll range corresponding to the rear image data resident in the rear image area 189, the scroll range not resident in the rear image area 189 is supported. Since the back image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 190, the back image data already stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used when displaying the back image of the scroll range that is not resident in the back image area 189. Thus, an image can be immediately drawn by the image controller and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, at the time of shifting from the display of the back image in the scroll range residing in the back image area 189b to the display of the back image in the scroll range not residing in the back image area 189b, the back image is read again from the character ROM 187. Since there is no need, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, the transition of the back image can be performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, in the character symbol area 189c, data corresponding to all character symbols may be resident, or data corresponding to some character symbols may be resident. Further, when data corresponding to a part of character symbols is resident, at least data corresponding to character symbols to be displayed immediately in response to a received command from the main control device 101 may be resident. As a result, when the character design is changed immediately upon receiving a reception command from the main control device 101, image data corresponding to the character design after the change is always resident in the character design area 189c. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  The notification effect image area 189d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the notification effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the error message image area 189e is used when an error occurs in the slot machine 10. In this area, image data corresponding to an error message displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is stored.

  For example, if the game is played with one or two bets, and the result of the lottery is that one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, or the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, the display control device 81 In accordance with the winning combination, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to perform control so that a BB prize announcement effect, a watermelon prize announcement effect, and a bell prize announcement effect are performed (see S903 to S908 in FIG. 20). In this case, in the display control device 81, the winning combination is grasped by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, and various announcement effects are performed according to the grasped winning combination. It needs to be performed before the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated by the player. In addition, since the main control device 101 operates the start lever 41 by the player after the start lever 41 is operated, the stop buttons 42 to 44 can be operated by the player after the start lever 41 is operated. In a very short time until the main control device 101, the main control device 101 draws a winning combination, and the lottery result is notified from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a lottery result command. The corresponding notice effect must be performed by the means 81. In this slot machine 10, the image data corresponding to each of the BB prize notice effect, the watermelon prize notice effect, and the bell prize notice effect is provided in the notice effect image area 189d. Is resident in advance, the display control device 81 is based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. When performing the BB winning announcement effect, the watermelon winning announcement effect, or the bell winning announcement effect, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 187, but is previously resident in the notice effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189. Each notification effect image can be drawn by the image controller 188 by reading out the image data. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, each notice effect image is stopped after receiving the lottery result command. The buttons 42 to 44 can be displayed before they can be operated by the player.

  Further, in the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 causes the inserted medal to be inserted based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device (the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b). When it is determined that the medals are jammed or the medal is pulled out illegally, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of a sensor error by an error command as described above. Also, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the main control device 101, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of the error together with the content of the error by an error command. The display control device 81 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the auxiliary display unit 65 when an error command is received.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the slot machine 10, the error message is displayed in the error message image area 189e. Since the image data corresponding to the various error messages is resident in advance, the display control device 81 newly updates the image data corresponding to the predetermined error message from the character ROM 187 based on the error command received from the main control device 101. The image controller 188 can immediately draw each error message image by reading the image data previously resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189 instead of reading the image data. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error messages from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, each error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The image controller 188 is provided with a buffer RAM 188a. This buffer RAM 188a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132) of the NAND flash memory 187a provided in the character ROM 187. It is configured by SRAM (Static RAM) having kilobytes, and is configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 181.

  When transferring image data from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 reads data for one block from the character ROM 187 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 188a. When the RAM 190 is not used, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190.

  If the buffer RAM 188 is not provided and image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the character ROM 187 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 187a, so that the reading speed is low. Therefore, during the transfer of the image data of the desired size, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 constituted by the 1-port DRAM is occupied by the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 187 for a long time. Time and other data access cannot be performed. Accordingly, during that time, the image controller 188 cannot read the image data from the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 to draw an image, or transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. There is a possibility that the image display of the auxiliary display unit 65 is delayed. Further, even when a multi-port type DRAM (a type in which a plurality of input / output ports are provided) is used for the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190, one port is occupied by image data transfer from the character ROM 187. Therefore, control using the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 in the image controller 188 is limited, and the control may be complicated.

  On the other hand, since the slot machine 10 is provided with the buffer RAM 188a composed of SRAM capable of high speed operation in the image controller 188, the image data read from the character ROM 187 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a. Then, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to.

  The display of the image on the auxiliary display unit 65 is periodically performed at regular time intervals (for example, about every 30 milliseconds), and the image controller 188 displays the image display timing on the auxiliary display unit 65. In accordance with this, drawing of the image and drawing image data must be transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the access to the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 needs to give priority to reading of image data necessary for drawing and writing and reading of drawing image data.

  In the slot machine 10, a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 188 is accessing (that is, in use) the resident video RAM 189, and the image controller 188 is for normal use. A normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the video RAM 190 is being accessed (that is, in use) is provided in the image controller 188. These access flags are both set to ON when the image controller 188 is accessing the corresponding video RAM, and set to OFF when not accessing. When the MPU 181 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 checks the contents of the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190, and reads out the image data necessary for drawing. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are in use by the image controller 188 for writing or reading the drawing image data. Then, when the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are not used, control is performed to transfer the image data. Thus, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without interrupting the reading of the image data necessary for drawing and the writing or reading of the drawing image data.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the display timing of the image in the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a scanning area of the screen included in the auxiliary display unit 65 and a display area where an image is actually displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 11, an area larger than a display area where an image is actually displayed is set as a scanning area, and when an image is displayed on the screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, Scanning from the left to the right and from the top to the bottom of the screen is performed while driving each pixel constituting the screen (a so-called raster scan). At this time, since the drawing image data is actually set only in the display area where the image is displayed, the period during which the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area is scanned (so-called blank period) The image controller 188 does not transfer drawing image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. That is, during the blank period, even when the auxiliary display unit 65 is scanned to display an image, it is not possible to draw an image using image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. In addition, the drawing image data stored in the normal video RAM 190 is not read out and transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, since there is always a period in which the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are not used during the blank period, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is By using the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189 and 190 generated during the blank period, it can be performed reliably.

  In the MPU 181, as a method for confirming whether the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use, signals transmitted / received between the image controller 188 and the resident video RAM 189, or an image controller The MPU 181 may monitor a signal transmitted / received between the 188 and the normal video RAM 190 and check whether the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use from the state of the signal. Further, when the image controller 188 starts access to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 or ends access, the MPU 181 notifies the MPU 181 of the information from time to time so that the MPU 181 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use.

  Further, when the image controller 188 scans the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 confirms the driving state of the image controller 188 or a notification from the image controller 188 to determine whether the blank period is in progress. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 189 and 190 are not used. Thereby, only the scanning state of the auxiliary display unit 65 of the image controller 188 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is not used.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 will be described. The processing of the MPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 1.49 msec), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process activated in response to an input. In the following, a process related to the progress of the game, that is, a timer interrupt process and a normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12, a timer interrupt process periodically executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. In the MPU 102 of the main control device 101, a timer interrupt is generated every 1.49 msec, for example, and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is executed by the MPU 102 in response to the timer interrupt.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, a register save process is performed (S101). In this register saving process, the values of all registers in the MPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Next, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure flag is set (S102). If the power failure flag is set (S102: Yes), a power failure process is executed (S103).

  Here, an outline of the power failure process executed in S103 will be described.

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) provided in RAM 106.

  In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the stack pointer value of the MPU 102 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. This prevents the reel unit 31 from running out of control until the power supply is completely cut off, and abnormal output from an output device such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

  Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal when the power failure is eliminated is stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of, for example, the case where the power failure flag is set erroneously due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state is recovered, so that writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the process proceeds to S104. If the power failure signal is continuously output, the infinite loop is entered. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output even under an infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is not output, the main processing is performed.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in the process of S102 (S102: No), various processes after S104 are performed. That is, in the process of S104, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. Next, the MPU 102 itself performs an interrupt end declaration process that enables the next timer interrupt to be set (S105), and the stepping motors of the respective rotary drive motors to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A stepping motor control process for driving the motor is performed (S106). Next, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 8) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read. At the same time, a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the reading result is normal (S107).

  In this sensor monitoring process, when there is an abnormality in the reading result of each sensor, for example, the inserted medal is clogged or pulled out from the detection result of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b. Is detected, it is determined that a sensor error has occurred, and the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) is notified of the occurrence of the sensor error. An error command including information is transmitted to the display control device 81.

  In the subsequent process of S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed (S108). Further, the bet number of medals and the result of counting the number of payouts are output to the external concentration terminal board 121. In / out counter processing is performed (S109).

  Next, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a start command and a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81 is performed (S110). After that, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed in the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed (S111), and then the segment set in the segment data setting process A segment data display process for supplying the data to the display units 60 to 62 and displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. is performed (S112).

  Then, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed (S113), and the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the processing of S101 are stored in the MPU 102, respectively. (S114). Thereafter, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S115), and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

  Next, normal processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing.

  The normal process is a process for performing main control related to the game. When the normal process is executed by the MPU 102, first, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S201), and then the game can be performed. A pre-start process is performed for this (S202). In this pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like finish initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, the game management process shown in the subsequent S203 to S213 is performed.

  As the game management process, first, in the process of S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, each random number used in the previous game, each winning flag indicating the winning of each winning except the BB winning), and the like. Clear and start wait processing is performed in the subsequent processing of S204.

  In the start waiting process of S204, it is determined whether or not a replay winning has been established in the previous game, and if a replay winning has been established, an automatic inserting process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet. To complete the start wait process. In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, when a replay winning is established in the previous game, the player can play this game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals.

  On the other hand, if none of the replay winnings has been established, a sensor for confirming whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result obtained in the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (see S107 in FIG. 12). An abnormality confirmation process is performed. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is set to an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

  If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process for paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal I do. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process If either one is performed, a medal insertion process is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended as it is.

  After completion of the start waiting process in S204, it is then determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached the specified number (S205). If the bet number has not reached the specified number (S205: No), S204 is determined. Returning to the start waiting process, the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed. In the present embodiment, the specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state of the slot machine 10.

  That is, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the general gaming state, the prescribed number is set to 1 to 3, and when it is in the bonus state, the prescribed number is set to 3. Thereby, in the general gaming state, the game can be started not only with three bets but also with one or two. When the game is started with one or two bets (one or two), the above-described one-lot drawing table or two in the lottery process (see S210) described later. The winning lottery table is set and the winning mode (role) lottery is performed. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, there is a high probability that the number of medals to be paid out is three. It is possible to establish a winning or 7-bell winning with two medal payouts. If three medals are paid out due to the Cherry Bell winning, the player can play another game while inserting the three medals and expecting the BB winning. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Also, if two medals are paid out due to the completion of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell prize to be completed, where another 3 medals are paid out. You can enjoy another game. If the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting three medals that are paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established. Can enjoy. Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is out of date, the game can be ended without leaving extra medals for the player. As described above, even if the number of bets is one or two in the general gaming state, the player can update the player by using the one-sheet lottery table and the two-sheet lottery table set in this embodiment. The game can be enjoyed and the game can be enjoyed to the end without extra medals.

  On the other hand, by setting the specified number of bets when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, in the bonus state, the watermelon having a large medal payout number is set while allowing the player to insert three medals. By increasing the winning probability of winning a prize or winning a bell and setting the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in one game high, the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state can be achieved to 250 with a small number of games. Therefore, the player can receive a lot of medals in a short time, while the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased on the hall side.

  If the number of bets has reached the specified number as a result of the processing of S205 (S205: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (S206). If the start lever 41 is not operated (S206: No), the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated (S206: Yes), the slot machine 10 is configured such that a game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are bet. Therefore, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game. Therefore, in such a case, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance (S207). In the subsequent process 208, an effective line setting process for setting an effective line is performed (S208). In this effective line setting process, all combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 are set as effective lines.

  Then, a start command is set (S209). Here, the start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp that a start command has been generated. In this normal process, information regarding the bet number (the number of medals inserted) accepted in the process of S205 is included in this start command and set. The start command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for storing various commands generated in the normal process, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) executed every 1.49 ms. This is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the processing of S110 of (see). Thereby, the display control device 81 grasps that the start command of the game is generated by receiving the start command and grasps the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted by the player for the game. It is possible to cause each auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) to execute various effects according to the number of bets.

  Thereafter, the lottery process of S210, the reel control process of S211, the medal payout process of S212, and the bonus state process of S213 are executed in order, and the process returns to S203. Then, in the interruption process (S103) of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 12), the processes from S203 to S213 are repeatedly executed until the power switch 71 is turned off or an infinite loop due to a power failure is entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the lottery process (S210) executed in the normal process (see FIG. 13) in the MPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the lottery process.

  In the lottery process, first, a random number used when the winning mode (role) is selected is acquired (S301). In the slot machine 10, as described above, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter 107 at that time. By reading the value of the counter 107 and storing the value in a predetermined area of the RAM 106, a random number value used for the lottery is obtained.

  After the random number is acquired by the process of S301, a lottery table setting process for setting a lottery table for performing a lottery in a winning mode is performed (S302). Here, the details of the lottery table setting process in S302 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a lottery table setting process executed in the MPU 102 of the main controller 101. In this lottery table setting process, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined, and further, according to the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) and the setting state set in the slot machine 10, the lottery table storage area 105a. A corresponding lottery table is set from among a plurality of lottery tables stored in.

  In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a bonus state (S401). As a result, if it is not a bonus state (S401: No), the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a general game. Since it is in a state, it is then determined whether or not the number of inserted medals (number of bets) is 3 (3) (S402). If the number of bets is three (S402: Yes), six three-sheet lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Among them, a three-sheet lottery table corresponding to the currently set state is set (S403), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, when the game is started with three bets, a three-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

  If it is determined that the number of bets is not 3 as a result of the process of S402 (S402: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 (2) (S404). If the number of bets is two (S404: Yes), the six two-sheet lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Among them, a two-sheet lottery table corresponding to the currently set state is set (S405), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. Thus, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, when the game is started with two bets, a two-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

  If it is determined that the number of bets is not two as a result of the process of S404 (S404: No), it can be determined that the number of bets is one (multiply by one). Of the six one-sheet drawing lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the one-sheet drawing lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set. (S406), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, when the game is started with one bet, a one-hatch lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

  On the other hand, if the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the setting is provided corresponding to the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Of the six bonus state lottery tables, the bonus state lottery table corresponding to the currently set state is set (S407), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the lottery process is returned to. Thereby, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state, a bonus lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set.

  As described above, in the lottery table setting process, the lottery table storage area 105a stores the current gaming state of the slot machine 10, the number of inserted medals (the number of bets), and the setting state set in the slot machine 10. A corresponding lottery table is set from the plurality of lottery tables.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description of the lottery process will be continued. When the lottery table setting process in S302 ends, the index value IV is then set to 1 (S303), and a determination value DV used when performing a lottery (win / no-go determination) in the winning mode is set (S304). In this decision value setting process, a new decision value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current decision value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and a new point value PV corresponding to 1 that is the current index value IV is added to the random value. The determination value is DV.

  Thereafter, in step S305, a lottery of a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV is performed. In this lottery, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the value exceeds 65535 (S305: Yes), the winning flag of the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 (S306). That is, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 1, in the process of S306, the BB winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and when IV = 2, the determination value DV exceeds 65535. In the process of S306, the watermelon winning / winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When IV = 3, the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it is set in the storage area 106a and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 4, in the process of S306, the cherry bell winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and determination is made when IV = 5 When the value DV exceeds 65535, in the process of S306, the 7-bell winning winning flag is set to the winning flag storage area 106a. Set, if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 at IV = 6, in the processing of S306 sets the replay winning winning flag to the winning flag storage area 106a.

  By the way, if the set winning flag is one of the watermelon winning flag, the bell winning flag, the cherry bell winning flag, the 7 bell winning flag, or the replay winning flag, the corresponding flag is set. It is reset after the played game is over (see S203 of the normal process shown in FIG. 13). On the other hand, when the set winning flag is the BB winning winning flag, the BB winning winning flag is reset as one of the conditions that the BB winning is established. In other words, the BB prize winning flag may be valid for a plurality of games. For example, after the BB winning winning flag is set, if the symbols are not aligned with the BB winning mode stop symbols, that is, if the BB winning is not established, the BB winning winning flag is not reset and is carried over to the next game. It is.

  In the process of S306 with the BB winning winning flag carried over, if the current index value IV is 1, the BB winning winning flag is not set, and if the current index value IV is 2 to 6, the index value is set. Set the winning flag corresponding to IV. In other words, in a game in which the BB prize winning flag is carried over, if a winning mode other than the BB winning is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, whereas if the BB winning prize is won, the corresponding BB winning flag is set. Do not set.

  If it is determined in the process of S305 that the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 (S305: No), it means that the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (S307), and then it is determined whether or not there is a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determinant to be drawn by lottery (whether or not) ( S308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determinant to determine whether or not to win (S308: Yes), the process returns to S304, and the determination of whether or not the winning mode is successful continues. At this time, in the process of S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for the determination of whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV. In the process of S305, whether or not the winning mode is successful is determined based on the determination value DV.

  Here, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the general gaming state by the lottery table setting process of S302, the three-hatch lottery table for the general gaming state, the two-hatch lottery table, the one-hatch lottery table Since the lottery table to be used is set from the table according to the number of bets, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the winning probability of the BB winning when the game is played by inserting three medals is 1 A lottery in a winning mode is performed after the game is set to be sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to have one player play a game by inserting three medals while expecting the player to obtain a lot of medals when the BB winning is established. Therefore, medals are consumed quickly, and it becomes possible to increase the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall.

  In addition, when a game is played by inserting one or two medals, a Cherry Bell winning prize with three medal payouts is set as a winning combination candidate and the winning probability is set high, and the winning mode is Since a lottery will be held, if one or two medals remain at the player's hand, if a Cherry Bell prize is established, it will be possible to obtain three medal payouts that can aim at the establishment of the BB prize with a high probability One can play a game by throwing in one or two medals remaining at hand while expecting the player. In addition, when a game is played by inserting one medal, a 7-bell prize with two medal payouts is also set as a winning combination candidate and the winning probability is set high, and the lottery of the winning mode is selected. So, if one medal remains in the player's hand, the player expects that two medal payouts aiming for the Cherry Bell prize will be obtained again if the 7-bell prize is established, One game can be played by inserting one remaining medal. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end without leaving extra medals.

  Further, when a lottery table for one-sheet drawing or a lottery table for two-sheet drawing is set and a lottery in a winning mode is performed, as described above with reference to FIG. Even in this case, the ratio of the number of medals paid out with respect to the number of bets can be set to a value less than 100% and as close to 100% as possible, and the lottery of the winning mode can be performed. Therefore, even if you play a single or double game, the medals will hardly decrease, so if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, use that one or two medals. And you can be sure that you want to play games. On the other hand, if the game is repeated with one or two cards, the number of medals will decrease, so that the player can not aim for an increase in medals by repeating the game with one or two cards. If there are three or more medals, the player can be directed to play the game with a high probability of winning a BB prize.

  In addition, by switching each lottery table according to the number of bets and performing a lottery in a winning manner, as described above with reference to FIGS. The winning mode is established only when the game is played, and when the game is played with 3 cards, it can be handled as a miss without establishing the Cherry Bell winning, so there is one Cherry Bell winning It is possible to draw attention to the player as a special small role prize dedicated for hanging and two-seat. Similarly, a winning mode that is established only when a 7-bell prize is played with a single game is used, and a 7-bell prize is not established when a game is played with two or three cards. Since it is handled as a detachment, it is possible to draw attention to the player, assuming that the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol stops with the cherry bell winning symbol or the seven bell winning symbol, a great joy can be given to the player.

  In addition, even when the game is played with one or two cards, although the winning probability is very low, it is possible to perform a lottery of the winning mode by setting so that the BB winning is established. When a game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a BB prize will be established.

  In addition, when the game is played with one or two cards, the chances of winning a watermelon or a bell are reduced, while the probability of winning a cherry bell or a 7-bell is set high, and lottery So that the player can be further impressed that the Cherry Bell prize or 7-bell prize is a special small part prize with one or two cards. When a game is played with two cards, the player can have a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established.

  After the winning flag is set in the process of S306, or when it is determined that there is no determinant to be lottery in the process of S308 (S308: No), it means that the lottery of the winning mode has ended. In such a case, a lottery result command is set (S309). Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, and the winning mode corresponding to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is displayed. A lottery result command is generated so that information suggesting that the winning combination is included. Therefore, not only the winning flag set by the lottery of this game but also the BB winning mode is a winning combination when the BB winning winning flag is carried over from the past game and stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. This is suggested by the lottery result command. If the winning flag is not set in the winning flag storage area 106a, it is suggested by the lottery result command that there is no winning combination.

  The lottery result command set here is stored once in a ring buffer (not shown) for storing various commands generated in the normal process, and is executed every 1.49 ms, like the start command. It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the process of S110 of the interrupt process (see FIG. 12). By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 executes drive control of the upper lamp 63 and the auxiliary display unit 65 to suggest a winning combination, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result command is set before the reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the winning mode lottery is performed. The lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81 within about 1.5 ms at the latest after the command is set (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt process). The display control device 81 is configured to execute a lottery result command process (see FIG. 20) described later without delay when a lottery result command is received. Therefore, after the start lever 41 is operated by the player. While the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is impossible, an effect or the like suggesting a winning combination can be executed by the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). Therefore, the player can grasp the winning combination suggested by the presentation before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, and the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the recognized winning combination. Can be adjusted.

  Next, a slip table setting process for setting a slip table (stop table) for reel stop control is performed (S310), and the lottery process is terminated. Here, the slip table is a table in which it is determined how much the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid (rotated) and stopped from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. That is, the slip table is a reaching symbol (arrival symbol) that has reached the base point position (in the present embodiment, the lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R) when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed. No.) and a stop data group capable of deriving the relationship between the stop symbol (stop symbol number) actually stopped at the base point position.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reaching symbol reaching the base point position is stopped as it is. A stop mode, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a four symbol pattern Five patterns of stop modes are prepared, including a stop mode for stopping after sliding. In the sliding table, for each symbol number of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode to be set when the symbol indicated by the symbol number becomes the reaching symbol is defined from among the five patterns. A number of sliding tables are prepared for each winning mode.

  By setting this sliding table, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to stop in a predetermined stopping manner from when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated until a specified time (190 msec) elapses. It is possible to make the player feel as if the symbol arrangement (stop appearance) that stops within the visible range from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is determined by the player's operation.

  In the slip table setting process of S310, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is confirmed, and the sliding table uniquely corresponding to the set winning flag is stored in the smooth table storing area of the RAM 106. Set to 106b. This makes it possible to stop a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning mode (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, as much as possible within the specified time, on the active line (see FIG. 6), It is possible to avoid the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning mode not winning the lottery from stopping on the active line.

  Here, as described above, the BB winning winning flag is configured so that once the flag is set, it is carried over to the next game until the BB winning is established, so the lottery performed in one game The winning flag corresponding to any of the watermelon winning, bell winning, cherry bell winning, 7 bell winning, and replay winning and the carry-over BB winning winning flag that are carried over are simultaneously set in the winning flag storage 106a. There may be. In this case, instead of the BB winning, the processing is performed so that the sliding table corresponding to the watermelon winning, bell winning, cherry bell winning, 7 bell winning or replay winning with the winning flag set is set in the smooth table storage area 106b. Done. As a result, the winning flag is cleared for each game, and if the winning is not established, the status as a winning role will be lost. The watermelon winning, bell winning, cherry bell winning, 7 bell winning, The replay winning can be established more reliably. Then, the BB winning flag corresponding to the BB winning that has not been won here is continuously maintained and carried over to the next game.

  When the cherry bell winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in the slip table setting process of S310, the cherry bell winning winning table is stored in the smooth table storing area 106b. Here, the “cherry” symbol which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the cherry bell winning is established is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind becomes seven symbols. As described above, the “cherry” symbol can be stopped at any one of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display window 26L regardless of the timing of operating the left stop switch 42. In addition, the “bell” symbol, which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the Cherry Bell winning is established, is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is five symbols or less. As described above, even when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any timing, the “bell” symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M.

  Therefore, in the cherry bell winning slide table, no matter what symbol has reached the base point position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, whatever symbol number is reached), the display window 26L A stop mode in which the “cherry” symbol can be stopped is set at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions, and any symbol arrives at the base point position when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed (that is, The stop mode is set so that the “bell” symbol can be stopped at the middle position in the display window 26M. Thus, when the Cherry Bell winning flag is set, the stop symbol corresponding to the Cherry Bell winning is displayed on the middle line L2 by the Cherry Bell winning sliding table regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player. , A right-down line L4, or a right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the so-called Cherry Bell winning can be established without missing.

  Further, when the 7-bell winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the 7-bell winning sliding table is stored in the sliding table storing area 106b. Then, the “7” symbol, which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the 7-bell winning is established, is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 7 symbols, like the “Cherry” symbol. In addition, as described above, the “bell” symbol which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the 7-bell winning is established is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 5 symbols or less. Has been.

  Therefore, in the 7-bell winning table, as with the Cherry Bell winning table, no matter what symbol has arrived at the base point position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, any reaching symbol number). However, any stop position that can stop the “7” symbol is set at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions in the display window 26L, and the base point position is changed when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed. Even if the symbol has arrived (that is, with any symbol number), a stop mode in which the “bell” symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position in the display window 26M. As a result, when the 7-bell winning winning flag is set, the 7-bell winning sliding table displays the stop symbol corresponding to the 7-bell winning in the middle line L2 regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player. Can be displayed on any of the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish a 7-bell prize without so-called failure.

  As described above, in the case of winning the lottery in the winning mode, when the Cherry Bell prize where three medals are paid out or the 7 bell prize where two medals are paid out is won, the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44. Regardless of the timing, the stop symbol corresponding to the cherry bell winning or the stop symbol corresponding to the seven bell winning can be displayed on any one of the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish a cherry bell prize or a 7-bell prize without so-called missing. Therefore, when the player starts the game with one or two cards, it is possible to reliably establish the cherry bell prize or the seven bell prize without depending on an artificial operation. In addition, a game can be played in anticipation of the establishment of a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize while aiming at a stop pattern of other prizes (for example, a BB prize).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the reel control process which is the process of S211 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the reel control process executed by the MUP 102 of the main controller 101.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (S501). In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started to rotate in the previous game. Wait until When the wait time has elapsed, a wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in a motor control storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106 is performed. Do. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (see S106 in FIG. 12) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the MPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting up a lamp (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Is notified to a player or the like.

  After the rotation start process of S501, a pre-stop process is then performed by the processes of S502 to S505. In the pre-stop process, it is first determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502). If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated (S502: No), the process of S502 is repeatedly executed to stand by until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502: Yes), the process proceeds to S503, whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, a stop command. Whether or not has occurred is determined (S503). If no stop command has been issued (S503: No), the process returns to S502 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. Thereby, when the stop switch corresponding to the non-rotating reel is operated, it is ignored.

  On the other hand, if a stop command is generated (S503: Yes), then whether or not the current stop command is the third stop command, that is, whether or not the stop switch is operated when only one reel is rotating. Is determined (S504). If the current stop command is the third stop command (S504: Yes), the subsequent process of S505 is skipped, the pre-stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the case of the first stop command that is generated when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, or the second stop command that is generated when two reels are rotating (S504: Yes), The process proceeds to S505, the first change process of the slip table is performed, and the pre-stop process is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to S506.

  Here, the first change process of the slide table is a process of changing the slide table stored in the slide table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 before stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command. In the first change process of the slide table, for example, when the first stop command is generated by operating the stop switches 43 and 44 other than the left stop switch 42, the slide table is changed.

  Now, when the pre-stop processing of S502 to S505 is completed, it means that the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated and a stop command is generated to advance the game. In such a case, a stop control process shown in S506 to S512 is then performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

  First, in S506, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the lower stage at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the lower stage is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Subsequently, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated from the data of the symbol number corresponding to the reaching symbol among the slip tables set in the slip table storage area 106b (S507). Thereafter, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the lower stage is determined (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol (S509). If they are not equal (S509: No), the process of S509 is repeatedly executed. If they are equal (S509: Yes), a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reels is performed (S510). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped (S511). When all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped (S511: No), the second change process of the slip table is performed. This is performed (S512). And it returns to the process of S502 and performs the process before a stop again.

  Here, the second change process of the slide table is a process of changing the slide table stored in the slide table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second change process of the slide table, the slide table is changed based on the set winning flag and the stoppage of the stopped reel. For example, in a situation where only the bell winning winning flag is set, when the 12th “bell” symbol of the left reel 32L and the 12th of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the upper part of the left reel 32L No. 13 and No. 13 “7” symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped, so the sliding table is changed to avoid the establishment of the BB winning.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S511 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped (S511: Yes), a payout determination process is performed (S513), and this process ends. The payout determination process is a process of setting a payout number of medals as one of the conditions that a combination of winning symbols is arranged on an active line.

  In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on each active line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a winning is achieved on the effective line. Determine. If a winning combination has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination matches the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination combination matches the winning flag, the winning combination combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination combination are set in a payout information storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not match the winning flag, an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed while the slot machine 10 is in an error state. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination is completed for all the active lines, the payout determination process is ended.

  Next, the outline of the medal payout process in S212 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area (not shown) in the payout determination process in S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16) is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process (see S513 in FIG. 16) that a winning for paying out medals has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not a replay winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination processing. Then, if the replay winning is not established, the medal payout process is finished as it is. If the replay winning is established, the replay state setting process is performed to change the gaming state to the replay state, and the medal payout process is finished. To do. In the start waiting process (see S204 in FIG. 13) executed in the normal process described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

  On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals are paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, when the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the payout number is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven and the medal is discharged from the hopper device 51. It pays out to the medal tray 50 through the exit 49. In the medal payout process, a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout is also performed. If the current gaming state is a bonus state, the payout number is subtracted from the value of a remaining payout counter, which will be described later, and the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the bonus state process executed in S213 of the normal process (see FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101.

  First, an outline of this bonus state process will be described. In the bonus state process, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a game that continuously shifts to the RB state is performed until a predetermined number of medals are paid out (250 in the present embodiment). is there. Then, 12 JAC games are played in one RB state, and if a winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. Further, the bonus state is ended when the medal payout number reaches the predetermined number, and when the medal payout number reaches the predetermined number in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state is ended.

  Next, details of the bonus state process will be described. In the bonus state process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a bonus state (S601).

  In this BB determination process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a (S602). When the BB winning winning flag is set (S602: Yes), the reel control is performed. Based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process executed in S513 of the process (see FIG. 16), it is confirmed whether or not a BB winning has been established (S603).

  When the BB winning is established in the process of S603 (S603: Yes), the BB start process is executed (S604). In the BB start process, the BB winning winning flag stored in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset and the setting flag stored in the state information storage area 106c is cleared, and then the BB setting flag is changed to the state information storing area 106c. To BB game, which is a kind of bonus game. Also, a process of setting 250 to the remaining payout number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the BB game and displaying 250 on the remaining payout number display unit 61. I do. Incidentally, whether or not the current gaming state is the bonus state (see S601) is determined based on whether or not the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c.

  Subsequently, in the process of S605, an RB start process is executed (S605). In the RB start process, 8 is set in the remaining JAC winning counter for counting the number of possible JAC winnings, and 12 is set in the remaining JAC game counter for counting the remaining number of JAC games. Each counter such as the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is provided in the state information storage area 106c. In the RB start process, an RB command transmitted to the display control device 81 is also set in order to grasp that the RB game is started.

  Next, in the process of S606, a status command is set (S607). Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the current gaming state. That is, if it is determined in the process of S602 that the BB prize winning flag is not set (S602: No), a status command indicating that the game is a normal game is set, and a BB prize is established in the process of S603. If it is determined that the game has not been performed (S603: No), a state command indicating that the game is a BB carryover game is set, and if the RB command is set in the process of S605, it indicates that the game is a BB game. Set the status command.

  Then, after the process of S607, a game number display process is performed (S607), and this process ends. In the game number display process, when the current game state is not a BB game (RB game), a process of clearing the display of the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the like is performed.

  Also, in the process of S601, when the gaming state is the bonus state (S601: Yes), based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process executed in the process of S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16). It is confirmed whether or not a watermelon winning or a bell winning that is a role winning is established (S608). When a watermelon winning or a bell winning is established in the processing of S608 (S608: Yes), the value of the remaining JAC winning counter is decremented by 1 (S609), and further, the value of the remaining JAC game counter is decremented by 1 (S610). Further, when the watermelon winning and the bell winning are not established (S608: No), one JAC game is consumed, so the value of the remaining JAC game counter is subtracted by 1 without performing the processing of S609 ( S610).

  Subsequently, in the processing of S611, it is confirmed whether either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter has become 0 (S611). In the process of S611, when any of them is 0, that is, when the JAC winning is established 8 times or the JAC game is digested 12 times (S611: Yes), it means that the RB game end condition is established. Therefore, an RB end process for resetting the values of the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is executed (S612). Accordingly, the JAC game is performed 12 times in one RB state, and if the winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state can be ended even before the JAC game is performed 12 times.

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout number counter is 0 (S613). If it is not 0 (S613: No), the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number. Since this means that the BB game end condition is not satisfied, the above-described RB start process is executed (S614). Thereafter, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (607), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when neither the remaining JAC winning counter nor the remaining JAC game counter is 0 in the processing of S611, that is, when the JAC winning is not yet established 8 times and the JAC game is not consumed 12 times. (S611: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout number counter is 0 (S615). If the counter value is not 0 in the process of S615 (S615: No), it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number and the BB game end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (S607), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 in the process of S615 (S615: Yes), it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, so the bonus state end process shown in S616 to S617 is performed. Execute. In the bonus state end process, first, the above-described RB end process is executed (S616), and then the BB end process for clearing the data in the state information storage area 153b is executed (S617). Further, in the above-described processing of S613, even when the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 (S613: Yes), it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, so the BB end processing of S617 is executed. To do. After the BB end process is performed, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game (that is, a general game state) is set (S606), a game number display process is performed (S607), and this process ends. Thereby, the bonus state can be terminated when the number of medals paid out reaches 250. If the medal payout amount reaches 250 in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state can be ended by the processing of S616.

  Next, each control process executed by the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 181 is roughly divided into a display main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a display timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 1 msec), and a command input from the main control device 101. And command interrupt processing for storing received commands in the received command storage area 185a. The command stored in the received command storage area 185a is checked during the display main process, and various processes are performed according to the contents of the command. Hereinafter, among the display main process, the command stored in the received command storage area 185a, the start command process for performing the process for the start command, the lottery result command process for performing the process for the lottery result command, and the process for the error command are performed. The error command processing will be described.

  First, the display main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the display main process. This display main process is executed when the power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or by turning on the power switch 71, and the display control device 81 and the initial stage of various devices such as an auxiliary effect unit controlled by the display control device 81 are initialized. Processing, command check processing received from the main control device 101, power failure processing when a power failure occurs, and the like are performed. Also, the transfer processing of the resident image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is executed by display surface processing as one processing of the initialization processing.

  When the display main process is executed, first, as one process of the initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 181 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 181 and the I / O device are performed. (S701). Next, the process proceeds to S702, and as one process of the initialization process, an image that is resident in the resident video RAM 189 in the processes of S702 to S710, that is, the main image at the time of power-on, the back image, the character design, and the notification Image data corresponding to each image such as an effect image and an error message image is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189.

  Specifically, in the process of S702, first, the main image data at power-on is first read from the character ROM 187, and the data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S702). When the power-on main image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the power-on main image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is then transferred to the resident video RAM 189 and stored in the power-on main image area 189a. (S703). If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is less than or equal to the capacity of one block (eg, 132 kilobytes) of the NAND flash memory 187a, which is also the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 188a, the process of S702 and S703 is performed once. Since all the main image data is transferred to the resident video RAM when the power is turned on, the process directly proceeds to S704. If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is larger than the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, all the main image data at power-on will be the main image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 189. The process of S702 and S703 is repeatedly executed until it is stored in 189a, and then the process proceeds to S704.

  In step S704, the image controller 188 is instructed to draw a main image when the power is turned on (S704). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the power-on main image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189, draws the power-on main image, and draws the drawn power-on main image. The corresponding drawing image data is temporarily stored in the normal video RAM 190 and then transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65 in accordance with the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this display, other resident image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and a normal image is drawn by the processing of S711 described later. Until it is instructed to continue.

  In this slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is stored in the resident video RAM 189 from the character ROM 187 due to the slow reading speed. It takes a long time to be transferred to the video RAM 189. Therefore, as in the main display process, after the power is turned on, first, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or the hall related person can check the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. . Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in an operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so that the slot machine 10 can be immediately started operating without a problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 187a with a slow reading speed for the character ROM 187 can suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  After the processing of S704, it is then confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in this embodiment) (S705). When it is in a lowered state (S705: Yes), it is determined that the power supply is cut off, and a power failure process is executed (S706).

  On the other hand, if the system state is not a voltage drop state in the processing of S705 (S705: No), then the image data to be resident except the main image data at power-on is sequentially stored from the character ROM 187 in the NAND flash memory 187a. One block is read out and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S707). When one block of image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the resident video RAM 189 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 189 is in use by reading accompanying drawing of the main image when the power is turned on (S708). While the video RAM 189 is in use (S708: Yes), the process of S708 is repeatedly executed to wait for the process. If it is determined that the resident video RAM 189 is not used (S708: No), the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and the area corresponding to the image data, that is, the rear image. It is stored in any of the area 189b, the character design area 189c, the notification effect image area 189d and the error message image area 189e (S709).

  As described above, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the time is passed from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed through the buffer RAM 188a configured by SRAM. Is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a, and when the resident video RAM 189 is not used, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 in a short time. Can do. Thus, while image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the resident video RAM 189 can be prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. The data stored in the resident video RAM 189 at the time of image drawing can be read without delay, the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be drawn without delay, and the drawn image data can be transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Can do.

  After the processing of S709, it is determined whether or not all the image data to be resident has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710). If untransferred resident target image data remains (S710: No) Returning to the process of S705, the processes of S705 to S710 are executed again, and the process of transferring the image data for one block from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is performed. Here, by the processing of S705, it is determined whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state every time image data for one block is transferred. As a result, even if the system state becomes a voltage drop state while transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time, the state can be reliably grasped. it can.

  If it is determined by the processing of S710 that all the image data to be resident has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710: Yes), then it is displayed in normal time (when a special effect is not displayed). The image controller 188 is instructed to draw a normal image (S710). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the back image and the character design stored in the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189, draws a normal image, and temporarily renders the drawn image data to the normal video. After being stored in the RAM 190, a process of transferring to the auxiliary display unit 65 in accordance with the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed. Therefore, a normal image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a player or a hall-related person can recognize that the initialization of the display control process has ended.

  Further, the image data to be resident is all transferred to the resident video RAM 189 during the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on by the processes of S702 to S710, so that the resident video RAM 189 is completed after the initialization process is completed. The image controller 188 can perform image drawing processing while using the resident image data. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 189 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, the responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player to displaying some image on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be kept high. it can.

  Subsequently, an interrupt mode permitting the command interrupt process and the display timer interrupt process is set (S712), the initialization process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S713. In the process of S713, it is confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in the present embodiment) as in the process of S705 (S713). If the system state is a voltage drop state (S713: Yes), it is determined that the power supply is cut off, and a power failure process is executed (S714).

  On the other hand, if the system state is not a voltage drop state in the process of S713 (S713: No), it is then determined whether or not the display timer interrupt process has been performed (S715), and the display timer interrupt process has been performed. If so (S715: Yes), a drive data output process for outputting drive data to the auxiliary effect section is executed (S716). Thereby, the output of the drive data to the auxiliary effect section is controlled so as to be executed at a cycle of 1 msec in which the display timer interruption process is performed. The determination as to whether or not the display timer interrupt process has been performed is turned on every time the display timer interrupt process is executed, and is turned off every time the drive data output process is executed. (Not shown) is provided in the work RAM 185, and is performed by detecting the value of this interrupt processing execution flag. That is, if the interrupt process execution flag is on, it is determined that the display timer interrupt process has been performed (S715: Yes), and the drive data output process is executed (S716).

  If it is determined in S715 that the display timer interrupt process is not executed (S715: No), or if the process in S716 is completed, an unprocessed received command is stored in the received command storage area 185a. It is determined whether or not (S717). If there is an unprocessed received command (S717: Yes), the received command check process is executed (S718), the received command stored in the received command storage area 185a is analyzed, and the received command is determined. Processing is executed (S719). For example, if the received command is a start command, start command processing (see FIG. 19) is executed, if it is a lottery result command, lottery result command processing (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if it is an error command, error command processing (see FIG. 19). (See FIG. 21). Details of each command processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Whether it is determined in the processing of S717 that there is no unprocessed received command in the received command storage area 185a (S717: No), or if the processing of S718 is completed, then the random number value used when selecting an auxiliary effect, etc. The update process is executed (S719), the process returns to S713, and thereafter the processes of S713 to S719 are repeatedly executed.

  Next, the start command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing start command processing. This start command process is a process executed when the start lever 41 is operated and a start command indicating that a game start command has been received is received from the main controller 101. The MPU 181 stores a command received from the main control device 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check process (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main process, and the command is a start command. If it is determined, the start command processing is executed.

  In this start command process, first, information related to the bet number included in the start command is extracted, and the extracted information related to the bet number is stored in the bet number storage area 185b of the work RAM 185 (S801). As described above in the description of S209 in FIG. 13, the bet number suggested by the information included in the start command is the medal inserted by the player for the game indicated by the start command to be started. The display control device 81 stores the information related to the bet number in the bet number storage area 185b, thereby assisting the production of the game to be started in accordance with the number of bets placed on the game. Control can be performed by an effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65).

  In the start command process, other processes corresponding to the start command are executed in response to the start command of the game ascertained by receiving the start command, such as control for causing the auxiliary effect unit to execute various effects (S802). ), This process is terminated. Thereby, various effects can be made to be performed by the auxiliary effect unit at the start of the game.

  Next, a lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing. This lottery result command processing receives from the main control device 101 a lottery result command indicating the result of a lottery (whether or not a winning combination determination) is performed in the main control device 101 in response to a game start command by operating the start lever 41. This process is executed when The MPU 181 stores the command received from the main control device 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check process (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main process, and the command is a lottery result command. If it is determined that there is, the lottery result command process is executed.

  In the lottery result command processing, first, information on the bet number stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and whether the number of bets placed on the game whose start command is indicated by the start command is three. It is determined whether or not (S901). If the number of bets is three (S901: Yes), an effect corresponding to the number of three bets is started in the auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65). Set (S902), and the lottery result command processing ends. Thus, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the set effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  At this time, when changing the back image or character design to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 based on another command received from the main control device 101, it corresponds to the back image area 189b or the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189. If image data of the back image or character design to be resident is resident, the image controller 188 reads the image data corresponding to the back image or character design from the resident video RAM 189 and draws the image. As a result, the time for newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 constituted by the NAND flash memory 187a having a long read time can be omitted, so that the image controller 188 can immediately draw and generate a predetermined image. . Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, the back image and the character design can be changed immediately.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of bets is not three as a result of the process of S901 (S901: No), the number of bets placed on the game for which the start command is indicated by the start command is one or two. It can be understood that it is a sheet. Therefore, it is next determined whether or not the winning combination grasped by the lottery result command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is in the BB winning mode (S903). If the BB winning mode is a winning combination (S903: Yes), a message “BB winning winning!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is a BB winning mode. “BB winning announcement effect” is set (S904), and the lottery result command is terminated. Accordingly, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the BB winning notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  If the winning combination is not in the BB winning mode as a result of the processing of S903 (S903: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the watermelon winning It is determined whether or not it is an aspect (S905). If the watermelon winning mode is a winning combination (S905: Yes), the message “Watermelon winning winning!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is a watermelon winning mode. “Watermelon winning announcement effect” is set (S906), and the lottery result command is terminated. Accordingly, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the watermelon winning notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  If the winning combination is not in the watermelon winning mode as a result of the processing of S905 (S905: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the Bell winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is an aspect (S907). If the bell winning mode is a winning combination (S907: Yes), a message “Bell winning winning!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is a bell winning mode. “Bell winning announcement effect” is set (S908), and the lottery result command is terminated. Thus, each auxiliary effect section is driven so that the bell winning notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  As described above, the winning combination in the game in which the number of bets is set to 1 or 2 by the process of S903 to S908 is determined by any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode. If it is, it is possible to cause the auxiliary effect section to execute a BB prize announcement effect, a watermelon prize announcement effect, and a bell prize announcement effect for notifying the player that the role has been won.

  Here, as described above, when the number of bets is one or two, the winning probability of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is suppressed to be extremely low. There is a high possibility of playing a game in anticipation of the establishment of the Cherry Bell winning mode or the 7 Bell winning mode. In addition, when the Cherry Bell winning mode or the 7 Bell winning mode is a winning combination, the winning combination can be established without losing any of the stop switches 42 to 44, so that one winning or the A player who has started a game with two cards is likely to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, or the bell winning mode is won as a winning role, and the player does not notice it, the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all overlooked. Since there is a possibility of winning, there is a risk of missing the winning combination. In addition, since the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the game until the BB winning mode is established, if the player finishes the game without noticing the winning of the BB winning mode, another player However, the BB winning mode is established based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has won the winning of the BB winning mode may lose as a result.

  On the other hand, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode is won in the game in which the number of bets is set to 1 or 2 by the processing of S903 to S908, the winning Are announced through a BB prize announcement effect, a watermelon prize announcement effect, and a bell prize announcement effect. Since the notification is made without delay in accordance with the reception of the lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101, as described above, the notification is performed while the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated by the player. Is called. Therefore, before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the player can know the winning of any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode. Therefore, when the player plays a game with one or two cards, if this notification is made by the auxiliary display unit 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning) grasped by the notification is obtained. Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol in order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the active line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. In addition, when the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, even if the player misses the game, the player can receive a new medal and continue the game until the BB winning mode is established. it can.

  In addition, when the BB winning mode is carried over from the past game and a plurality of winning combinations are set together with the winning combination in the current game lottery, the slip table setting process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 In S310 of FIG. 14, a sliding table corresponding to a winning combination other than the BB winning mode is set. In this lottery result command processing, a lottery is performed when the number of bets is set to one or two. The winning combination determined by the result command is determined from the BB winning mode (see S903). As a result, if the winning combination in which the slip table is set is a watermelon winning aspect or a bell winning aspect, the winning combination may be missed, but if the BB winning aspect is set as a winning combination, Since the BB winning announcement effect is preferentially performed, the player can be surely grasped that the BB winning mode more advantageous to the player is the winning combination.

  In addition, as described above, in the lottery result command process, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 by the main process executed by the MPU 181. It is executed when it is determined that it is a command. The lottery result command is a reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the lottery (whether the winning combination is determined) accompanying the game start command. (See S309 in FIG. 14), and within about 1.5 ms later (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt process), the lottery result command is displayed. Is transmitted to the device 81.

  Further, in the display control device 81, image data corresponding to images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in various notification effects such as a BB winning notification effect, a watermelon winning notification effect, and a bell winning notification effect are notified in the resident video RAM 189. Since the display control device 81 is resident in advance in the effect image area 189d, the display control device 81 performs the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. When the image controller 188 determines that the image controller 188 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 but reads the image data previously resident in the notification effect image area 189 d of the resident video RAM 189, the image controller 188. Each notice effect image can be drawn. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187. Even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, each notification effect image is immediately received after receiving the lottery result command. These notification effect images can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  Therefore, after the player operates the start lever 41, it assists the notification effect etc. of the winning combination from when the player operates any of the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The production unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) can be executed. Therefore, since the player can grasp the winning combination before operating any of the stop switches 42 to 44, the recognized winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) is established. Can be surely aimed at the player.

  As a result of the processing of S907, if the winning combination is not in the Bell winning mode (S907: No), if the number of bets is 2, whether the Cherry Bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is set as the winning combination, If the number of bets is one, it can be determined that the Cherry Bell winning mode, the 7 Bell winning mode, or the Replay winning mode is set as a winning combination, It can be understood that the combination is not set (that is, it is out of place). Therefore, next, information regarding the bet number stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the number of bets placed on the game indicated by the start command is two. Determination is made (S909).

  If the number of bets is two (S909: Yes), the message “Challenge!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a dedicated sound is output from the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 is dedicated. The “Cherry Bell winning challenge effect” to be lit in the above manner is set (S910), and the lottery result command processing is terminated. Thus, each auxiliary effect unit is driven by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process so that the cherry bell winning challenge effect is executed. If the number of bets is not two (S909: No), it can be grasped that the number of bets is one, so the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a message “Cherry Bell and 7 Bells Challenge!” A special sound is output from the speaker 64 and a “Cherry Bell Winning / 7 Bell Winning Challenge Effect” for turning on the upper lamp 63 in a dedicated manner is set (S911), and the lottery result command processing is terminated. As a result, the auxiliary effect units are driven so that the cherry bell winning and 7 bell winning challenge effects are executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  By the processing of S910, the “Cherry Bell winning challenge effect” is executed in the auxiliary effect section, so that when the game is played with two cards, it is expected that three medals will be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning mode is established. The player can have a strong feeling. In addition, in the process of S911, the “Cherry Bell Award / 7 Bell Award Challenge Effect” is executed in the auxiliary effect section. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece, the Cherry Bell prize or the 7 bell prize mode is displayed. It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that three or two medals will be paid out upon establishment. Therefore, since the player can play a game with one or two cards while having fun, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that he wants to play a game without leaving an extra medal.

  Next, error command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command process is a process in which an error detected by the main control device 101 is notified by the auxiliary effecting unit. When the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a and it is determined that the command is an error command, this error command processing is executed.

  In this error command process, first, information on the error type included in the error command is extracted (S951). Then, display of an error message corresponding to the extracted error type is set (S952), and this error command processing is terminated. As a result, an error message corresponding to the auxiliary display unit 65 is displayed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process, the upper lamp 63 is blinked, and an alarm sound is emitted from the speaker 64. Each auxiliary effect unit is driven.

  Here, as described above, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. Since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the message image area 189e in advance, the display control device 81 reads out the resident image data based on the error command received from the main control device 101. Thus, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188. Therefore, it is not necessary to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, each error message is immediately received after receiving the error command. Can be displayed.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the first embodiment, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. After the processing is completed, the image controller 188 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65 by drawing the image. In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 are made resident in the resident video RAM 189. Responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the user to displaying some image on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be kept high.

  In the slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187 a is used for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character ROM 187 due to the slow reading speed. Although it takes a lot of time to be transferred to the resident video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at the time of power-on. Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or the hall-related person can display the main power-on time displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The image can be confirmed.

  Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Also, in an operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so that the slot machine 10 can be immediately started operating without a problem when the power is turned on. Can be confirmed. Therefore, the use of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 187 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 62, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 200 will be described as a second embodiment. FIG. 22 is a front view of the pachinko machine 200 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board 213 of the pachinko machine 200, and FIG. 24 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 200.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 200 has an outer frame 211 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 211. And an inner frame 212 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 212, the outer frame 211 is provided with two metal hinges 218 at the upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), and the side on which the hinge 218 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. A frame 212 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side.

  A game board 213 (see FIG. 23) having a large number of nails, winning holes 263, 264 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 212 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 213. The inner frame 212 has a ball launch unit 312a (see FIG. 26) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 213 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 312a to the front area of the game board 213. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 212, a front frame 214 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 215 that covers the lower side of the front frame 214 are provided. In order to support the front frame 214 and the lower plate unit 215, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22). 214 and the lower pan unit 215 are supported to be openable and closable to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 212 and the locking of the front frame 214 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 221 of the cylinder lock 220 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 214 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 214c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 216 having two sheet glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 214, and the front surface of the game board 213 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 200 through the glass unit 216.

  On the front frame 214, an upper plate 217 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape projecting forward to open the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 217. The bottom surface of the upper plate 217 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 217 is guided to the ball launch unit 312a by the inclination. A frame button 222 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 217. This frame button 222 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (FIG. 23), which will be described later, or when changing the contents of the effect of super reach. .

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 200, there are three “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. In addition, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed in accordance with the entry to the first entrance 264 (start winning prize) to be described later are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage change is performed when the frame button 222 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation. "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 281 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach production mode during normal reach. If operated, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 214 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window 214c, there are provided electric decoration parts 229 to 233 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 200, these lighting parts 229 to 233 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 229 to 233 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 214 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), there is provided a display lamp 234 that has built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 235 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 214 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 232, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 213 (see FIG. 23) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 200. In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, a plating member 236 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 229 to 233 in order to bring out more glamor.

  A ball rental operation unit 240 is disposed below the window 214c. The ball lending operation unit 240 is provided with a frequency display unit 241, a ball lending button 242, and a return button 243. When the ball lending operation unit 240 is operated with a bill or a card inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 200, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 241 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 242 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 217 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 243 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, the ball rental operation unit 240 is unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 217 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 240 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 215 located on the lower side of the upper plate 217 has a lower plate 250 formed in a substantially box shape in which the upper surface is opened in order to store balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 217 at the center. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 250, an operation handle 251 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 213 is disposed. Touch sensor 251a, a push button-type stop switch 251b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 251 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 251 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 251a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 251. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 213 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 251 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 251a and the stop switch 251b are off.

  A ball removal lever 252 for operating the balls stored in the lower plate 250 downward is provided at the front lower portion of the lower plate 250. This ball release lever 252 is always urged to the right, and by sliding to the left against the urge, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 250 opens, A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 252 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 250 is placed below the lower plate 250. As described above, the operation handle 251 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 250, and the ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 250.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the game board 213 has a wooden base plate 260 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball guide nails, windmills and rails 261 and 262, a general winning opening 263, The ball entrance 264, the variable winning device 265, the variable display device unit 280, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 212. The general winning opening 263, the first winning opening 264, the variable winning device 265, and the variable display device unit 280 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 260 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 213. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 213 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 212 through the window 214c (see FIG. 22) of the front frame 214. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 213 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 262 is formed on the front surface of the game board 213 by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape. The arc-shaped inner rail 261 formed in the above is planted. The inner periphery of the front surface of the game board 213 is surrounded by the inner rail 261 and the outer rail 262, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 213 and the glass unit 216 (see FIG. 22). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 213 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 261 and 262 and the arc member 270 (a winning opening etc. are provided, Area).

  The two rails 261 and 262 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 312a to the upper part of the game board 213. A return ball prevention member 268 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 261 (upper left portion in FIG. 23) to prevent a situation where a ball guided to the upper part of the game board 213 once returns to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 269 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 262 (upper right part in FIG. 23) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. Further, a resin arc member 270 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end portion of the inner rail 261 and the upper right end portion of the outer rail 262 is a base. The plate 260 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 237a and a 7-segment display 237b as light emitting means on the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 23). A display device 237 is provided. The first symbol display device 237 performs display in accordance with each control performed by the main control device 310 to be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200. The plurality of LEDs 237a display a change display by indicating whether or not the change is made in accordance with the entry to the first entrance 264 (start winning prize) by a lighting state, or a stop pattern after the end of the change. As for a ball (reserved ball) whose variation has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 264, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is indicated by a lighting state. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 237b is for displaying the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 237a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 200 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors.

  In the pachinko machine 200, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 264, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is determined that the big hit, the type of the big hit is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and hourly jackpot are prepared. The LED 237a not only shows whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of two rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Also, “time-saving big hit” is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds and is in a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 264. On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short-time state (short-time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the first entrance entrance It means a game state in which a ball easily enters H.264. It should be noted that instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 264 is opened, or once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases by hit.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 263 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 280 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 280 has a liquid crystal display that displays the variation of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variation display in the first symbol display device 237, triggered by a ball entering the first entrance 264 (start winning prize). (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), a second symbol display device 281, and a second LED configured to variably display the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 267. A symbol display device 283 is provided.

  The third symbol display device 281 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 314 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 is demonstrated. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 281. FIG. 25 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 25B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 310 (see FIG. 26) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 281 is roughly divided into two vertically, the lower 2/3 being the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and the others The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 264, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 25B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 264 while the variable display is being performed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 (the 1st symbol display device 237), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 237 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first entrance 264 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Further, in place of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be a number in a part of the third symbol display device 281 or the area divided into four areas may be different by the number of reserved balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 280 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls for the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. The variable display device unit 280 is provided with a center frame 286 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 281. In the third symbol display device 281 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 310 is performed by the first symbol display device 237, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 237 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 281 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  The second symbol display device 283 displays a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entrance 267. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 200, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 283 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 264 is in an operating state for a predetermined time (opened). Configured). The number of passing balls through the second entrance 267 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 237 and also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 284. Four second symbol holding lamps 284 corresponding to the maximum number of holdings are provided, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 281.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 283 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol. A part of the display device 281 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 284 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 281. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 267 is not limited to the maximum number of retained balls as in the case of the first entrance 264, but is limited to 4 times, or less than 3 times or 5 times (for example, , 8 times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, the second symbol reservation lamp 284 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 280, a first entrance 264 through which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 264, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 213 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 310 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237. Further, the first entrance 264 is also one of the entrances through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 265 is disposed below the first ball opening 264, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 265a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 200, when the lottery in the main control device 310 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 265a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 265a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 265a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 265a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 265 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 265a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 265a is normally closed in a state where a ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the specific winning opening 265a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 265a, and the LED 237a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 237, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 265a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 265a while the port 265a is opened. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 213. It can be visually recognized through a small window 235 (see FIG. 22).

  Further, the game board 213 is provided with an out port 266. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 263, 264, 265a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 266. A number of nails are planted on the game board 213 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 24, control board units 290 and 291 and a back pack unit 294 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 200. The control board unit 290 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 310), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 313), and a display control board (display control apparatus 314). The control board unit 291 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 311), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 312), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 315), and a card unit connection board 316.

  The back pack unit 294 includes a back pack 292 that forms a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 293 as a unit. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 310, the sound lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 315, and the card unit connection board 316 are housed in the board boxes 300 to 304, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 300 to 304 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  The board box 300 (main control device 310) and the board box 302 (payout control device 311 and launch control device 312) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 300 and 302, or if the substrate boxes 300 and 302 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 300 and 302 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 293 includes a tank 330 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 294 and opens upward, a tank rail 331 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 330 and gently tilts toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 331. A case rail 332 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 333 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 332 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 416 (see FIG. 26). ing. The tank 330 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 333 as appropriate. A vibrator 334 for applying vibration to the tank rail 331 is attached to the tank rail 331.

  The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 320, the firing control device 312 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 321, and the power supply device 315 is provided with a RAM erase switch 322. The state return switch 320 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs such as a ball clogging in the payout motor 416 (see FIG. 26). The operation knob 321 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 322 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 200 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200.

  The main controller 310 is equipped with an MPU 401 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 401 includes a ROM 402 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 401 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 402 is executed. A certain RAM 403 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 311 and the sound lamp control device 313. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 310 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 200 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 283. The RAM 403 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 27, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 403 of the main controller 310 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 in order to perform a lottery lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 283, etc. Used in.

  The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 include a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 283, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 42). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 403. The RAM 403 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has an access to the first entrance 264. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the entry timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 264. Stored in And the value of the random number that becomes the big hit is set by the big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 of the main control device, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table. A jackpot is determined when the value matches a random number that is a jackpot. In addition, this jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (period that is not probabilistic) and one for high probability (high probability) that has a higher probability of jackpot than that low probability. The number of random numbers that are included in the jackpot is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between a low probability and a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 at the time of the big hit, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9), and a maximum value (for example, In the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 9, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 9). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball is stored in the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 264. Stored in the area.

  Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is displayed. The corresponding display mode is the one at the time of detachment.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area is a random number that is a big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is that of the big hit It becomes. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first per random number counter C1, the number of random number values that are jackpots at low probability is 3, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low probability jackpot random number table. On the other hand, the number of random numbers that is a big hit at a high probability is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448 , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the random number that is the jackpot stored in the low probability jackpot random number table and the value of the random number that is the jackpot stored in the high probability jackpot random number table are duplicated values. In order not to become, the value of the random number which becomes each big hit is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 200, the value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 200 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a jackpot, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-9. In the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is “6, 7, 8, 9”, the big hit type is “15R probable change that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum round number is 15 big hits. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “4, 5”, the big hit type is “2R probable change that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a big hit of two rounds. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0, 1, 2, 3”, the big hit type shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 big hits. At the same time, there is a “time-saving big hit” that is in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 200 according to the present embodiment is configured such that three types of hits (15R probability variation per unit, 2R probability variation per unit, and short-term per unit) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first per type counter C2. Has been.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop pattern at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 281. After reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 264. Stored.

  In addition, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values from which stop patterns are selected are provided in the ROM 402 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop pattern is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 200 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the “completely out” stop pattern is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” is selected in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 264. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 264 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 281 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 281 are determined by the sound lamp control device 421 and the display control device 314. . The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 267. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined to be winning, and the symbol “◯” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 283. Is displayed and the first entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  As described above, the RAM 403 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 310 displays the big hit lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processes of the pachinko machine 200 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 283 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 27, the RAM 403 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 401, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 401, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored. Note that the RAM 403 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the pachinko machine 200 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 403 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 403. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 200 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 403. Writing to the RAM 403 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 42), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 403 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 401 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 403 further includes a reserved ball number counter 403a. The held ball number counter 403a holds the fluctuation display (fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 281) performed on the first symbol display device 237 based on the entry to the first entrance 264 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times. The reserved ball number counter 403a has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time a ball enters the first entrance 264 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S1403 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the held ball number counter 403a is decremented by 1 every time a change display based on a ball entering the first ball slot 264 (start winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 37).

  The value of the held ball number counter 403a (that is, the number of held balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 313 by the held ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 39). The held ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 every time the ball is entered into the first entrance 264 and the held ball number counter 403a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 313 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 every time the reserved ball number counter 403a is incremented by 1, the value of the variable number of held balls held in the main control device 310 itself. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls for variable display managed by the number of held balls counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 deviates from the number of held balls for actual variable display held in the main controller 310 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if this happens, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 313 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 314 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 314 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  On the other hand, the number-of-holding balls command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 matches the number of balls held and the timing of entering the first entrance 264 (start winning timing). Thus, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer of the RAM 403 are also included and notified to the sound lamp control device 313.

  When the reserved ball number command is received by the voice lamp control device 313, the voice lamp control device 313 sets the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 included in the held ball number command. From each value, the stop display mode when the variation effect based on the corresponding start winning is performed is estimated, and the estimated stop display mode and the value of the number of held balls at that time indicated by the held ball number command From this, it is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous notice effects for the variable effects that are reserved at that time.

  The continuous notice effect is a kind of notice effect that suggests that there is a high probability that the result of the lottery performed with the start winning prize will be a big win. ), The same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 together with the variation effects. For example, the “bubble” image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 immediately after the suspension display of the variation effect over all the suspended variation effects, so that the jackpot symbol does not appear as the stop symbol of the variation effect. Even if the player does not win the game, the player can view the “bubble” image continuously immediately after the change stops over a plurality of change displays. The expectation that can be obtained can be given, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

  Also, “egg” is displayed during the first variation effect, “chick” is displayed during the second variation effect, “chicken” is displayed during the third variation effect, and during the fourth variation effect. “Chick group” is displayed (however, when the number of held balls at the time when the continuous notice effect is set is 3 or less, “chicken group” is displayed in the last variation effect set for the continuous notice effect) Thus, every time a variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 281, the symbol displayed by the continuous notice effect gradually changes (steps up), so that the player gradually changes this symbol. By looking at the player, when the chicken group is displayed, the player can have a sense of expectation that is a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

  In addition, when the variation effect set for the continuous notice effect is 3, the continuous notice effect is performed in the order of “egg” → “chick” → “chicken group”, and the change effect set for the continuous notice effect is 2. In some cases, a continuous notice effect is performed in the order of “egg” → “chicken group”, and when the variable effect set for the continuous notice effect is 1, the “chicken group” is displayed suddenly. In this way, when the number of variation effects set for the continuous notice effect is 3 or less, the symbols on the way are skipped and the chicken group is displayed suddenly, so that the player can select the suddenly displayed chicken group. Seen, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that is a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 200, the main control device 310 uses the number-of-holding ball number command to obtain the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the time of winning a start. 313 and the sound lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous notice effect and the setting of the state of the continuous notice effect based on the values of the various counters and the value of the number of reserved balls notified by the reserved ball number command. Do. Thereby, the process in the main controller 310 can be concentrated on the lottery process for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entrance to the first entrance 264, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 200. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 having a high processing capability is used for the audio lamp control device 313, the execution conditions for the continuous notice effect can be set in various modes.

  Further, the number of balls held and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 with one command for the number of held balls. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 313, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired with the start winning and the number of held balls when the starting winning is detected. When execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the number of reserved balls to which the continuous notice effect is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, compared with the case where the number of held balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 by different commands, the control in the sound lamp control device 313 is facilitated. be able to.

  An input / output port 405 is connected to the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 via a bus line 404 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 405 includes a payout control device 311, a sound lamp control device 313, a first symbol display device 237, a second symbol display device 283, a second symbol hold lamp 284, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 265a. A solenoid 409 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 401 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 405. Send.

  The input / output port 405 is connected to various switches 408 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 453 described later provided in the power supply device 315, and the MPU 401 is output from the various switches 408. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 453.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by driving the payout motor 416. The MPU 411 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 412 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 411, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 413 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Similar to the RAM 403 of the main control device 310, the RAM 413 of the payout control device 311 stores the stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 411 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 411 are stored, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 413 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the pachinko machine 200 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 413 is backed up. As with the MPU 401 of the main controller 310, the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 411, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 415 is connected to the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 414 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 310, the payout motor 416, the firing control device 312 and the like are connected to the input / output port 415, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 311 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 311, but not connected to the main control device 310.

  The launch control device 312 controls the ball launch unit 312a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 251 is obtained when an instruction to launch a ball is given by the main control device 310. The ball launch unit 312a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 251a is detected by the touch sensor 251a that the player is touching the operation handle 251, and the stop switch 251b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the rotation amount of 251, and a sphere is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 251.

  The sound lamp control device 313 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 426, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 229 to 233, the display lamp 234, and the hold lamp 285). It controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 281 performed by the display control device 314 such as a variation effect (variation display) and a continuous notice effect. The MPU 421 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 422 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 421, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 423 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 via a bus line 424 including an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 310, a display control device 314, an audio output device 426, a lamp display device 427, a vibration sensor 428, a frame button 222, and the like are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 313 monitors the input from the frame button 222, and when the player operates the frame button 222, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 314 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 314 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 281. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  The vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 200, the entrance to the entrance is an important factor that determines the game state, so the flow of the ball is changed by vibration, and intentional entry into the entrance is prevented. There is a need. Therefore, if it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 428 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 200 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 314. In addition, the sound lamp control device 313 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 310 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 313, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 314. The display control device 314 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 281 without delay.

  The RAM 423 of the sound lamp control device 313 is provided with at least a reserved ball number counter 423a. The reserved ball number counter 423a is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 237 (and the third symbol display device 281), like the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the control device 310.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 313 cannot directly access the main control device 310 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a stored in the RAM 403 of the main control device 310. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 313 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 310, and manages the number of reserved balls by the reserved ball number counter 423a.

  Specifically, when the sound lamp control device 313 receives a pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 when the suspended ball number of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 264, Then, the value of the held ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 (that is, the number of held balls in the variable display held by the main control device 310) included in the held ball number command is stored in the held ball number counter 423a ( (See S2007 in FIG. 46).

  Also, the voice lamp control device 313 receives a variation pattern command that is a variation display instruction command from the main control device 310, and sets the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 281 with the reception of the variation pattern command. The value of the ball counter 423a is decremented by 1 (see S2205 in FIG. 47). Thus, since the value of the held ball number counter 423a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main controller 310, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the held ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310. .

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 281. That is, the voice lamp control device 313 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 423a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, or the reserved ball number counter 423a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 314 of the value of the stored ball count counter 423a after storage or after update, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 314.

  When the display control device 314 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it displays a hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the hold ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 (see S2751 in FIG. 57A). As described above, the value of the held ball number counter 423a is changed in synchronization with the hold counter 403a of the main control device 310. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the hold counter 403a of the main controller 310. Therefore, the third symbol display device 281 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  In addition, the RAM 423 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 310 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a variation start flag (not shown). The command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound lamp processing device 313 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed. The variation start flag is turned on when a variation pattern command output from the main controller 310 is received (see S2002 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when variation display is set on the third symbol display device 281. (See S2102 in FIG. 47).

  The display control device 314 is connected to the sound lamp control device 313 and the third symbol display device 281, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 313, the third symbol display device 281 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 314 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 315 includes a power supply unit 451 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 200, a power failure monitoring circuit 452 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 322 (see FIG. 24). And an erasing switch circuit 453. The power supply unit 451 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 310 to 314 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 451 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 408, solenoids such as a solenoid 409, motors, etc., 12 volts, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 310 to 314 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 452 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 and the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 452 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 451, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute an NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 451 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 310 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 453 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 310 when the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 200 is turned on, the main control device 310 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 311 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 311.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 314. The display control device 314 includes an MPU 431, a ROM (program ROM) 432, a work RAM 433, a character ROM 434, a resident video RAM 435, a normal video RAM 436, an image controller 437, an input port 438, and an output port 439. And bus lines 440 and 441.

  The input side of the input port 438 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 313, and the output side of the input port 438 is connected to the MPU 431, ROM 432, work RAM 433, character ROM 434, and image controller 437 via the bus line 440. ing. A resident video RAM 435 and a normal video RAM 436 are connected to the image controller 437, and an output port 439 is connected via a bus line 441. A third symbol display device 281 is connected to the output side of the output port 439.

  Note that the pachinko machine 200 has a model with exactly the same specifications as the symbol structure displayed on the third symbol display device 281 even if it is a different model with a different lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 314 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 431, the character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 will be described first, and then the ROM 432 and the work RAM 433 will be described.

  First, the MPU 431 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 281 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 313.

  The character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 are all the character ROM 187, the image controller 188, the resident video RAM 189 provided in the display control device 314 of the slot machine 10 in the first embodiment. It has the same configuration or function as the normal video RAM 190.

  That is, the character ROM 434 is a memory that stores image data displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In order to store a large amount of image data, the character ROM 434 can obtain a large storage capacity in a small area and is inexpensive. It consists of memory. In this embodiment, a 2-gigabyte NAND flash memory is used. As a result, a large number of images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be stored, so that the images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be diversified in order to further enhance the interest of the player. ing.

  Further, the character ROM 434 is the same as the arbitration circuit 187b provided in the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, which performs data address conversion to read / write data while avoiding a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 434a. A known arbitration circuit 434b having a function (see, for example, Patent Document 1) is provided.

  The image controller 437 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 437 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 35) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 431, and either one of the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 281 to display the image on the third symbol display device 281. . The image controller 437 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame for an image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 281 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 437 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 431 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 431 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 49), and instructs the image controller 437 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 437 executes a drawing process for the next one frame of image, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 281 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 431 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 437 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 437. Therefore, the image controller 437 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 431 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 437 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. Therefore, the image controller 437 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 437 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 431 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the normal video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436. In other words, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 based on an instruction from the MPU 431 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 314, the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 after power-on. It is configured to Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 435 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the initialization process is completed, the image controller 437 can perform an image drawing process while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 constituted by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 281 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 435 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310 or the display control device 314. Even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 435, the display control device 314 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 before the drawing. The MPU 431 is configured to instruct the image controller 437 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 436 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 436, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 435. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed.

  Similar to the buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 in the first embodiment, the image controller 437 includes a buffer RAM 437a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 434a. Yes.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 431 performs to the image controller 437 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 434 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 437 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 according to various information in accordance with this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 437a, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 437a when the resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 434 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 435 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 281 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 437 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. A period that is not used for the display process on the device 281 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 435 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 434 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on, like the display control device 81 in the first embodiment. In addition to an hour main image area 435a, a back image area 435c, a character symbol area 435e, and an error message image area 435f, a power-on variation image area 435b and a third symbol area 435d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 435a is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while the display control device 314 is performing initialization processing when the power is turned on, similarly to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment. This is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image to be displayed upon power-on. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 435b, a game is started by the player while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 281, and a ball entering the first ball inlet 164 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main control device 310 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 451 is started, the MPU 431 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a. Then, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 437 (see S2202 and S2203 in FIG. 57).

  Here, referring to FIG. 29, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 29 shows that the display control device 314 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 immediately after the power is turned on, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 314 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a, and then the resident video RAM 435. The remaining image data to be stored is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 314 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 435a to turn on the power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command, which is a variation start instruction command, is received from the audio lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position on the screen, and as shown in FIG. 29C, the “×” symbol is stopped at the same position as the “○” symbol. Images are displayed alternately during the fluctuation period. Then, the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 310 is judged from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 313. The image shown in FIG. 29 is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and in the case of “out”, the image shown in FIG. 29C is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 431 uses the image data stored in the main image area 435a at power-on for the image controller 437 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435. Instructs drawing of main image when power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the hall-related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 281. it can. Accordingly, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. Also, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 435b, and the images shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As described above, since the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been reliably performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 435 b, so the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 264 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. it can.

  Further, since the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is stored in the main image area 435a at power-on and the fluctuation image area 435b at power-on of the resident video RAM 435, a power failure is instantaneously generated. If the data resident in the resident video RAM 435 remains, the image data resident in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b at the time of power recovery can be used. The power-on main image and the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. The back image area 435c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 similarly to the back image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, with reference to FIG.30 and FIG.31, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c among the back images and the back images is demonstrated. 30 and 31 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 for each back image, as shown in FIG. FIG. 30B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 31 shows the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Of the backs A to C, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 434. The image controller 437 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as the display region, the smoothness is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 222 to change the stage, the MPU 431 first sets the position between the position a and the position a ′ as the initial position of the display area, and the image at the initial position is the third symbol display device. The image controller 437 is controlled so as to be displayed at 281. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 281, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31, the rear image on the rear surface C is displayed in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. Displayed on the device 281. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 281. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 222, the rear image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 31B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 31 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back image shown to Fig.31 (a), and the back image of Fig.31 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 30A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 435. It is stored in the image area 435c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 435c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 434 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 314 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 435c. The back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 31A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 31A and 31B excluding FIG. Are stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and are resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 222 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 222 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 435 for all the back images. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the initial position of the rear image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is within the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 31A and 31B is stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of a NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed, the back image area of the resident video RAM 435 can be used when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 222. By using the image data resident in 435c, the initial position of the back surface B or the back surface C can be immediately determined by the third symbol display device 281. It is displayed, also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 436 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 436 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 281.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images in FIGS. 31A to 31B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. The range shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436 can be completed. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 31B to 31C and FIGS. 31C to 31A is displayed as the normal video RAM 436 while the images of FIGS. 31A to 31B are displayed. 31 (a) and 31 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and stored in the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 31B to 31C and FIGS. 31C to 31A can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281 over time. it can.

  Note that on the back B and back C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 436a (see FIG. 28) of the normal video RAM 436. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 437 by the MPU 431, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and then the normal video By using the image data stored in the RAM 436 to display the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 281, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 431 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 436 to control the image controller 437 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area. The MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so that the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area using the image data of the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. To do. Thus, the third symbol display device 281 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the position a and the position c flows toward the left.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 435d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In other words, in the third symbol area 435, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 25) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the third symbol display device 281, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 187 one by one, so even if the NAND flash memory 187 a is used for the character ROM 187, the third symbol display device 281 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 264 occurs, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 281 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 237. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 435d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 200 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 281.

  The character symbol area 435e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as in the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 200, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 435e, so that display control is performed. When the device 314 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 313, the device 314 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, but stores it in the character design area 435e of the resident video RAM 435 in advance. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 437 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, the character design can be changed immediately even when the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 434.

  Similar to the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment, the error message image area 435f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 200. In the pachinko machine 200, when the sound lamp control device 313 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 428 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the sound lamp control device 313 displays the occurrence of the vibration error by an error command. 314 is notified. In addition, when the sound lamp control device 313 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 313 notifies the display control device 314 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 314 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 281 when an error command is received.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 200, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 435f in advance, so that the display control device 314 receives the error message of the resident video RAM 435 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 435f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 437. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 434, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  Similar to the normal video RAM 190 of the first embodiment, the normal video RAM 436 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed. The normal video RAM 436 includes an image storage area 436a, a first frame buffer 436b, and a second frame buffer 436c. Is provided at least.

  The image storage area 436a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The image storage area 436a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 431 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 436 a of the normal video RAM 436 from the character ROM 434. The image controller 437 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 437 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 431 from the character ROM 434, and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 436a via the buffer RAM 437a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 431 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The image controller 437 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 431 into one of the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c, and thereby stores one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read out to the third symbol display device 281 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 281 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c, the image controller 437 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer. Then, it is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 281.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 281 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds completed, the MPU 431 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 281. At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 281. At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are replaced with either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  The ROM 432 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 431 and fixed value data, and has at least a data table storage area 432a.

  The data table storage area 432a includes a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 310, and a main control. In addition to an effect based on a command from the device 310, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is displayed by an additional data table describing the display contents to be displayed with time and a display data table. This is an area in which transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing are stored.

  The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on a command from the main control device 310. A display data table corresponding to the display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the background image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 200.

  The fixed display effect is the third symbol display device when the stop symbol is fixedly displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 after the variation effect. This is an effect displayed on the screen 281. For example, when the stop symbol is an out symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 2R probability jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  In addition, the restart effect vibrates the third symbol when a fixed command transmitted from the main control device 310 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. This is an effect of displaying the displayed image on the third symbol display device 281. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change in the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  The data table storage area 432a stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect, the confirmed display effect, and the restart effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Further, in the variation display data table, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed when the variation effect is stopped and displayed, for example, the variation display data table A display pattern table for special variation is also prepared, which is used when an outage stop symbol is instructed by the main control device 310 when the effect pattern is a winning variation effect pattern. This special variation is such that the third symbol is displayed at a high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 is received via the sound lamp control device 313, and the confirmation command is received. Accordingly, a special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3”, “4”, and “1” in order from the left column) is determined as a stop symbol.

  When the variation effect pattern instructed from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not coincide with each other, the display control device 314 performs the operation in the main control device 310. There is a possibility that the variation effect and the final display effect cannot be performed by correctly reflecting the result of the lottery. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 200, a special variation effect is performed in such a case, and a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 after the variation display. Even if the result of the lottery in 310 is out of place, it is possible to prevent the jackpot confirmed display effect from being erroneously performed on the third symbol display device 281. Even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, if the lottery result in the main control device 310 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the finalized display a special stop symbol, even if the finalized display is off, it can be suggested to the player that the pachinko machine 200 may be in a big hit state, The pachinko machine 200 is in a big hit state despite the fact that the confirmation display is off, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 281 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the image content (drawing content) for one frame.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 281 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 281 where the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variation table display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one background image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing light insertion and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 281. The enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  The MPU 431 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A to C as the drawing target when the rear surface type specifies that any one of the rear surfaces A to C is displayed. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 431 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 281) based on the display database. In this case, the MPU 431 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 281) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 281) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and image drawing based on the display database (or the third symbol display device 281 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 281) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313. Enter information. As a result, the fluctuating effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by main controller 310.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 310. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 32). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the effects to be specified in the display data table are displayed. Have been described.

  The MPU 431 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313, reads out the data from the data table storage area 432a, and displays the data on the work RAM 433, which will be described later. While storing in the data table buffer 433b, a pointer 433e described later is initialized to zero. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, 1 is added to the pointer 433e, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e, A drawing list (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, is created by specifying the contents of the image to be drawn, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 433e, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 431 in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 313. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 431 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since the start and execution processing of a complicated and enormous program is enormous, the processing capacity of the display control device 314 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect as described above, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 200, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. A display data table corresponding to the production cannot be provided. As described above, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 200 is configured to determine an effect to be displayed in advance on the third symbol display device 281 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 310. It is a thing. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 310. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. This includes the concept of displaying another effect on the one effect, changing a part or all of the color tone of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. .

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 310. Also, the drawing content required to change part or all of the color tone in the one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one production are predetermined. It is.

  In the present embodiment, continuous notice displayed in addition to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 310. The case where the display content for displaying the effect is defined by the additional data table will be described.

  That is, the additional data table is prepared in correspondence with, for example, a continuous notice effect that is additionally set with respect to the variable effect. , “Chick”, “chick”, and “chicken group”, additional data tables are stored in the data table storage area 432a.

  In the additional data table, the contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are precisely specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. The drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed on the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 281 to draw a sprite, such as a translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 33, two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) are respectively associated with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table. Sprite types (effect type, character type), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, this means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. None data is defined (the address “0001H” in FIG. 33 is applicable).

  Note that “0000H”, which is the top address of the additional data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 33, “00FDH”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the effects to be specified in the additional data table are displayed. Have been described.

  When the MPU 431 receives the continuous notice command from the audio lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice mode indicated by the continuous notice command from the data table storage area 432a, and adds an additional data table in the work RAM 433 described later. Store in the buffer 433c. Then, every time the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. The image contents to be drawn next are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 35) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 33, when the pointer 433e becomes “0097H”, the MPU 431 is defined by the various data sprites defined by the display data table address “0097H” and the address “0097H” of the additional data table. The drawing list is created by adding the effect 1, effect 2, character 1, and character 2 sprites, and the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 433e is “0001H”, since the None data is defined at the address “0001H” of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”.

  Then, by sending the drawing list to the image controller 437, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Thus, according to the update of the pointer 433e, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table An image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, an effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313 or the like. In the case where another effect image (for example, a continuous notice effect image) is displayed in addition to (for example, a variable effect image), an additional data table buffer is added with an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be displayed additionally. By setting to 433c, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are five types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, a display that prescribes an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × 5 = 160 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, like this pachinko machine 200, a data table corresponding to another effect image is separately defined as an additional data table. Thus, 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 432a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 432a, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

  Moreover, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 433b by prescribing another effect image to be added and displayed as an additional data table like the present pachinko machine 200, Even when display of other effect images to be displayed additionally is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. By simply setting in the data table buffer 433c, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

  Since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 433c. While updating the pointer 433e for each time from the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 310, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 313 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentations from a small number of data tables.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 435, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 432a can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 34 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 34).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the top address of the additional data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 34, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 431 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 313, if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, The transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 432a and stored in a transfer data table buffer 433d of the work RAM 433 described later. Then, every time the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. Specifically, a drawing list (see FIG. 35) to be described later is created, and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d And transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 34, when the pointer 433e becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 431 displays the transfer data information specified by the address of the transfer data table in the display data table and the additional data table. It adds to the drawing list created based on it and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 437. On the other hand, when the pointer 433e is “0002H”, the transfer data table address “0002H” defines None data, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 436a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 436a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  In the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 sets the display data table in the display data table buffer 433b according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, the sprite image data used in the display data table is reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 at a desired timing. Can be transferred.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in sprite units, the transfer of the image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 436 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 281 even if the character ROM 434 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. The work RAM 433 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 431, and includes a simple image display flag 433a, a display data table buffer 433b, an additional data table 433c, and a transfer data table. 433d, a pointer 433e, a drawing list area 433f, a time counter 433g, a stored image discrimination flag 433h, and a drawing target buffer flag 433i.

  The simple image display flag 433a indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C on the third symbol display device 281. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 433a is used to display the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281 in the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 431 after the power is turned on. The controller 437 is turned on in accordance with an instruction to draw the main image when the power is turned on (see S2204 in FIG. 57). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 435 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281, It is set to off (see S3105 in FIG. 60B).

  The simple image display flag 433a is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 49). When 433a is on, a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 49B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 49B) so that an image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. ) (See S2409). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 433a is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 50 to 54) and display are performed so that various images are displayed according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 313. Setting processing (see FIGS. 55 to 59) is executed.

  The simple image display flag 433a is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 431 in the V interrupt process (see S3001 in FIG. 60A), and the simple image display flag 433a is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 60B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 435. If the simple image display flag 433a is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 61) for transferring image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 433b is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with a command from the sound lamp control device 313 or the like. The MPU 431 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 313, selects a display data table corresponding to the effect from the data table storage area 432a, and The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b. Then, the MPU 431 adds the pointer 433e one by one, and the image controller 437 for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b. A drawing list (see FIG. 35) to be described later describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 281 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b.

  The additional data table buffer 433c is displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b in response to a command from the sound lamp control device 313. This is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to a performance (such as a continuous notice effect). As the MPU 431 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 433b, the MPU 431 once writes None data indicating that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 433c. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, the MPU 431 performs an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b based on a command from the sound lamp control device 313 or the like. When there is an effect to be determined and displayed and to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect is selected from the data table storage area 432a, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. To do.

  Then, the MPU 431 adds the pointer 433e one by one, and stores the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table buffer 433c. In the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 35) to be described later describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 437 is generated for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e. . As a result, the third symbol display device 281 displays the effect corresponding to the additional data table in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. If the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, None data is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. Therefore, the third symbol display device 281 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

  The transfer data table buffer 433d is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b in response to a command from the sound lamp control device 313 or the like. The MPU 431 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 432a in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 433b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 433d. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is stored in the resident video RAM 435, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 431 clears the content by writing None data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 433d.

  Then, the MPU 431 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d while adding the pointer 433e by one. If this is the case (that is, if None data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 437 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can always be stored in the image storage area 436a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  The pointer 433e is used to display the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image from the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 433b, additional data table buffer 433c, and transfer data table buffer 433d. This is for designating an address from which data transfer data information is to be obtained. The MPU 431 once initializes the pointer 433e to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b. The display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 437 completing the drawing process for one frame (S2403 in FIG. 49). (Refer to S2711 in FIG. 55), and the value of the pointer 433e is incremented by one.

  The MPU 431 updates the address indicated by the pointer 433e each time the pointer 433e is updated, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. A drawing list (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in the above, and a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d The transfer data information of the image data is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and an additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the presentation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. . Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 436a. As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  The drawing list area 433f is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 437 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 437 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 35, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 437 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The address controller is described, and the image controller 437 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 437 into either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 433i.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, the MPU 431 draws the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on the contents of the image (for example, a reserved image that displays the number of reserved balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) ) And rearrange the detailed information for each sprite to create a drawing list.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type defined in the display data table and the additional data table and other image contents. It is generated according to the sprite type. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 435 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 431 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 431 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 437 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d, the MPU 431, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 434 and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 436a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 437 starts from the predetermined area of the character ROM 434 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

  The time counter 433g is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b. The MPU 431 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with the storage of one display data table in the display data table buffer 433b. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 281 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (see FIG. 49). Each time the display setting process is executed, the time counter 433g is decremented by 1 (see S2713 in FIG. 55). As a result, when the value of the time counter 433g becomes 0 or less, the MPU 431 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image determination flag 433h indicates whether the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 for all the sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 435. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not.

  The stored image determination flag 433h is generated by an initial setting process (see S2201 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 431 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image determination flag 433h generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 436a.

  The stored image determination flag 433h is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 431. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “on” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 436a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 436a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Also, the MPU 431 refers to the stored image determination flag 433h when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the data is already stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435 (see S3212 in FIG. 61). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 436a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3213 in FIG. 61). The image controller 437 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 436a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 314 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 440. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 433i is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 437 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 436b and second frame buffer 436c). When the drawing target buffer flag 433i is 0, the first frame buffer 436b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 433i is 1, the second frame buffer 436c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 62).

  As a result, the image controller 437 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 437 reads out the previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 281 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 281 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 433i, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 49) is executed (see S3302 of FIG. 62).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 281. At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 281. At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are replaced with either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 to 42. The process of the MPU 401 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process The main process will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 310 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 899, 9, 99, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 237 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance port A start winning process associated with winning the H.264 is executed (S1105). Details of the variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 251a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 251 and the stop switch 251b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main control device 310 instructs the launch control device 312 to launch a ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1201). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the first symbol display device 237 at the time of jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is not changing. (S1202: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 237 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1204, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1203: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 403a (the number of held balls N of the variable display held in the main control device 310) Is determined to be greater than 0 (S1204). If the value of the held ball number counter 403a (the number of held balls N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 403a (the number of held balls) N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 237 is executed (S1207). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (the number of held balls N) is 0 (S1204: No), a state where a demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 281; It is determined whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S1208). In this determination process, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 314 via the sound lamp control device 313, the value of the held ball number counter 403a (the number of held balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1212), and this process ends. If it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S1208: Yes), This process is finished as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1212 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 401. , Transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313. The sound lamp control device 313 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 314, and the display control device 314 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the change display is not started when a predetermined time has passed after the stop of the change, the demo command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has passed (S1210). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 237 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time has elapsed. If not (S1210: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 237 is updated (S1211), and this process is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 237a of the first symbol display device 237, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 237 has passed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 237 is set (S1212). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, by the process of S1206, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Depending on the value of C2, the symbol will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) or the 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a promising big jackpot to be transferred, or a symbol that will be a short and big jackpot (a big jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a maximum of 15 rounds of big hit).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change big hit is reached after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED are turned on when the short time big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 281 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 237. Then, a confirmation command is set for confirmation (S1213), and this process is terminated. When the sound lamp control device 313 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 314 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 281 stops the variation, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 281 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, the variation start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1207). This variation start process (S1207) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 37) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, A lottery (win / no-go decision) for “big hit” or “off” is performed, and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of a change effect performed on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a lottery (win / no-go determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 200 is a normal low probability, “7,307,582” among the values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 becomes a win value, and the pachinko machine 200 When the state (mode) that can be taken is high, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596 , 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are hit values. In the processing of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with these winning values, and if they match, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. .

  If it is determined as a big win as a result of the processing in S1301 (S1301: Yes), the display of the big win is displayed based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. A mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2, ie, the 15R probability variable jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the maximum round number of 15 rounds or the maximum number of rounds is high after the jackpot of 2 rounds. The display mode of the first symbol display device 237 (the lighting state of the LED 237a) is set based on whether the 2R probability change jackpot that shifts to the state or the maximum hit count of 15 rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds and the transition to the low probability state Is done. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the 3rd symbol display device 281, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, hourly jackpot) is set as the stop type. Is set. Of the numerical values 0 to 9 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of “0, 1, 2, 3”, after that, the state shifts to a low probability state (hits in time and college), and in the case of “4, 5”. Thereafter, the state shifts to a high probability state (2R probability variation jackpot). In the case of “6, 7, 8, 9”, the state transitions to a high probability state (15R probability variation jackpot).

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S1303). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the jackpot symbol in the third symbol display device 281 is determined. The At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the game is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is set whether it is front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detachment, or complete detachment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S1305), the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 281 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S1303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 is completed, a variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern type to the display control device 314 is set (S1306). The variation pattern is selected from a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 according to the lottery result in S1301 or the variation time determined in S1303 or S1305.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "15R fixed jackpot and short-time jackpot common fluctuation pattern," 15R shared normal reach "," 15R shared super reach "," 15R shared special reach ", etc. Various types of “15R Probability Special Reach” are defined as patterns, “Special Variation” is defined as a variation pattern for 2R Probability Large Hits, and “Common Normal Reach”, “Common Super” "Reach" and "Shared special reach" are defined . Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the lottery result in S1301 or the variation time determined in S1303 or S1305.

  Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 314 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 42). The The sound lamp control device 313 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 314 as it is. When the process of S1307 ends, the process returns to the fluctuation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 36), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 264. From the value hold processing indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the various random number counters held, the permission determination processing for starting the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening (start winning) (S1401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 264 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 264 (S1401: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 403a (the number of held balls N of the variable effects held in the main control device 310) is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1402). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 264 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 264, if the number of reserved balls N <4 is not satisfied (S1402: No) Return to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 264 (S1401: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 403a (number of held balls N) is set. 1 is added (S1403), and the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 are added to the free reserved area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403. The first area is stored (S1404).

  Next, the number N of reserved balls updated by the process of S1403 and the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area by the process of S1404 are obtained. An included reserved ball number command is created (S1405), the created reserved ball number command is set (S1406), the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. This held ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 42). The voice lamp control device 313 manages the number of held balls in the voice lamp control device 313 based on the number of held balls N included in the held ball number command, and also sets various counters included in the held ball number command. Based on the value, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is determined.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 401 in the main controller 310. Then, the MPU 401 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 403 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout / release control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 413 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 in the payout control device 311 and the MPU 411 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 when the main control device 310 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 313 and the payout control device 311) to be operable, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 403 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) provided in the power supply device 315 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1611 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 403, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 403 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 311 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When the payout control device 311 receives this payout initialization command, the payout control device 311 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 413, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 310 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 403.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 322. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 322 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 403 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 403 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 403 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 403, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 403 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 311 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 311 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 413.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 234 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 36) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 311 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 39) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, etc. necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 281 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 312.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read (S1703). Mouth) A large opening / closing process for opening or closing the 265a is executed (S1704). In other words, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 265a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 265a. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 265a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 265a is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 283 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 283 is obtained. The variation display of the second symbol is performed at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 264 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 403, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1706, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 452 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, the power-off process after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 311 and the voice lamp control device 313). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 403 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 403.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 310, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 401 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 310 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main controller 310 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47. The processing of the MPU 421 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 43, a startup process executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is on, the power-on process of S1917 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 44). ) Is determined during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, when the sound lamp control device 313 receives a power-off command from the main control device 310 (see S1914 in FIG. 44), it executes a power-off process in S1917. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1917 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1917. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 310). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 423 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 423 by the process of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 423. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 423 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 423 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 423 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 423 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 423 (the memory in the RAM 423 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1917, or reset only to the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 423, and therefore the data in the RAM 423 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1917, the sound lamp control device 313. The MPU 421 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 423 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 423 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 423 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 423 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 423 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 423. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 423 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified by the display lamp 234. The sound output device 426 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 423, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 314 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 281. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1917 is executed (see S1916 in FIG. 44). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1917 is executed, the process of S1808 in the state in which the power-off flag is turned on leads to the process of the current startup. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1917 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 313 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 423 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 310.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 310). Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 423, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S1809 is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is reached via the process of S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 423 have already been cleared by the process of S1804. When only the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 423 is stored without being cleared, thereby the sound lamp control device 313. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1901 was executed (S1901). If not (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1912 without performing the processes in S1902 to S1911. In S1901, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not in S1902 to S1911 regarding display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec), whereas in S1912 This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation display process and the command determination process of S1913 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1913 with a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 310. By executing the process of S1912 with a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 314 set by the processes of S1903 to S1913 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 314. Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 234 and the lamp lighting mode edited in the processing of S1909 described later are set (S1903), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 314 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, the hold number display update processing is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting effect, when the time when the pachinko machine 200 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 281 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. To 314. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamp 285 is performed according to the value of the number-of-holds counter 423a.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 222 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 222 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 222 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 314 that the frame button 222 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame effect 222 is pressed during a period when the change effect is not executed or during a high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 314 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 314 converts the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 into an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, press the frame button 222 to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or press the frame button 222 during reach production to increase the expectation of the jackpot It is good also as a decision button for changing to the effect which can be held, or selecting one reach effect among the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 222 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is finished, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S1908). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 200 by monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 428.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 428 is read from the vibration sensor 428 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 44).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 200, and the sound output device 426 is set to output an alarm sound (S1953) and display An error command for notifying the controller 314 of the occurrence of a vibration error is set (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 44). Thereby, in the display control apparatus 31, the process which displays the error message image which alert | reports a vibration error on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 44, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1909), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 229 to 233 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 281. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 426 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 281, and sound is output from the sound output device 426 according to the setting. Also, when an alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 45) (see S1953), an alarm sound output pattern is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is sounded. Output from the output device 426.

  After the process of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911), and the process proceeds to S1912. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1909 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 281.

  In the process of S 1912, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 281, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, and the command is displayed on the display control device 314. A variable display process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 310 (S1913). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1913 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 433 (S1914). The information on occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 310. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the process of S1914 (S1914: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1916), and the power-off process is executed (S1917). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1918), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1914 (S1914: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 423 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 423 (S1915), and the RAM 423 is destroyed. If not (S1915: No), the process returns to S1901 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1915: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 281 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a hall clerk or the like to request repair of the pachinko machine 200 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 423 is destroyed, the sound output device 426 or the lamp display device 427 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the command determination process (S1913) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1913). This command determination processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313, and determines the command received from the main control device 310 as described above. . This process also determines the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 281 when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 310.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 310 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 423, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 310. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S2001). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the variation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is turned on (S2002), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2003). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 423, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 47) described later, the variation pattern for display that notifies the display control device 314 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting a command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 310 (S2004). If it is determined that a stop type command has been received (S2004: Yes), a display stop type command is set in order to transmit the stop type command to the display control device 314 as it is (S2005).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop type command has not been received (S2004: No), it is then determined whether or not a pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 310 (S2006). When it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310 included in the held ball number command (that is, held by the main controller 310). The number of reserved balls of the variation effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 (S2007).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 310 when the ball wins the first entrance 264 (start winning), and therefore, every time there is a starting win, the process of S2008 is performed. The value of the held ball number counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 can be matched with the value of the held ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310. Therefore, even if the value of the held ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 is deviated from the value of the held ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise or the like, The value of the held ball number counter 423a can be corrected to match the value of the held ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310.

  Further, after the process of S2007, a display-use reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 314 of the value of the held ball number counter 423a updated by the process of S2007 is set (S2008). Thereby, in the display control apparatus 314, a process is performed so that the number-of-holding-ball symbols according to the number of the holding balls is displayed on the third symbol display apparatus 281.

  Thereafter, a continuous notice determination process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to the main process. In this continuous advance notice determination process, from the value of the number of reserved balls received from the main control device 310 by the reserved ball number command and the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, It is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect for displaying the notice effect image continuously over the fluctuating effects reserved at the time. When performing the continuous notice effect, whether the same image (for example, a “bubble” image) is displayed over a plurality of variable effects as the continuous notice effect form. , Related images are displayed in order each time a fluctuating effect is performed (for example, each image is displayed in the order of “egg” → “chick” → “chicken” → “chicken group”). It is determined whether to make an aspect.

  Specifically, the determination as to whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect is performed at the time when the reserved ball number command is transmitted based on the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is performed based on the result of the lottery performed in response to the held ball held in step 1 and the stop type after the fluctuating effect, and based on the estimation result and the number of held balls held at that time. For example, when it is estimated that the stop type after the fluctuating effect is 15R probability variation big hit or out of front / rear reach, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Further, in this case, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is performed with a higher probability as the number of reserved balls is larger.

  In addition to this, when the estimated lottery result is a big hit, regardless of the stop type, the continuous notice effect may be performed with a predetermined probability, or the result of the lottery is missed. However, when the stop type is reach, that is, when it is estimated that the reach is other than forward / backward reach and other than forward / backward miss, the continuous notice effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. As described above, the condition for determining the continuous notice effect may be set as appropriate according to the gameability that the pachinko machine 200 has.

  In addition, as the continuous notice effect mode, the condition of the same effect type or the step-up type may be appropriately set. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the sound lamp control device 313, and the continuous notice effect mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

  In the pachinko machine 200, the main control device 310 uses the number-of-holding ball number command to obtain the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the time of winning a start. 313 and the sound lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous notice effect and the setting of the state of the continuous notice effect based on the values of the various counters and the value of the number of reserved balls notified by the reserved ball number command. Do. Thereby, the process in the main controller 310 can be concentrated on the lottery process for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entrance to the first entrance 264, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 200. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 having a high processing capability is used for the audio lamp control device 313, the execution conditions for the continuous notice effect can be set in various modes.

  Further, the number of balls held and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 with one command for the number of held balls. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 313, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired with the start winning and the number of held balls when the starting winning is detected. When execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the number of reserved balls to which the continuous notice effect is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, compared with the case where the number of held balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 by different commands, the control in the sound lamp control device 313 is facilitated. be able to.

  As a result of the process of S2006, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S2010), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 313, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 423, and if the command is used in the display control device 314, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 314. Demo commands and confirmation commands received from the main control device 310 are set as display demonstration commands and display confirmation commands by the processing of S2010, and are transmitted to the display control device 314.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the fluctuation display process (S1912) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this variation display processing (S1912). This variation display processing (S1912) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313, and as described above, the variation design is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In order to do this, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, and a variation display process, which is a process set to transmit the command to the display control device 314, is executed. In addition, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is updated in accordance with the display of the variation effect, and a display reserved ball number command is set and generated to notify the display controller 314 of the updated reserved ball number. When it is determined to perform the continuous notice effect for the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display change pattern command, the continuous notice command is set after the display change pattern command.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 310. End and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46). The change pattern type in the changed change effect is acquired from the RAM 423 (S2103).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the acquired variation pattern type to the display control device 314 is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 314 (S2104). The display control device 314 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol variation display is performed on the third symbol display device 281 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start display control of fluctuating effects.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the value of the retained ball number counter 423a is decreased by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the retained ball (that is, the variation display corresponding to the retained ball is set). (S2105) A display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 314 of the reserved ball number indicated by the value of the updated reserved ball number counter 423a is set (S2106). The display control device 314 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 281 to display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of balls held by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the decision to perform the continuous notice effect is made by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) for the change effect corresponding to the display change pattern command set by the process of S2104. (S2107) When the decision to perform the continuous notice effect has been made (S2107: Yes), a continuous notice command for notifying the display control device 314 of the execution of the continuous notice effect is set (S2108). This process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2107, when the decision to perform the continuous notice effect is not made (S2107: No), the variable display process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the continuous notice command set by the process of S2108 is displayed in addition to the variable notice effect according to the continuous notice effect mode determined by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46). Continuous notice image type (any of “bubble”, “egg”, “chick”, “chicken” and “chicken group”) is included. When receiving the continuous notice command, the display control device 314 adds a continuous notice image of the type indicated by the continuous notice effect command to the change effect performed based on the previously received change pattern command for display. Processing is performed so as to display on the display device 281.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 431 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 313, and one frame worth from the image controller 437. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 431 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 431 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 313 can be reflected quickly and the V interrupt process can be executed.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  When the main process is started by the MPU 431 when the power is turned on, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2301). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 431 and clearing the memory of the work RAM 433, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 433, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 437, the image controller 437 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 281. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 281. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 281 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 200 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start is normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435 (S2202). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 434 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435), and the transfer destination. The main address of the main image area 435a at the time of power-on is included, and according to this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of power-on is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the main image at power-on of the resident video RAM 435. Transferred to area 435a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 437 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 431. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 431 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 437 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register provided in the image controller 437 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may make it write. Then, the MPU 431 reads information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects the completion of the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 437. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 435a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 in the process of S2202, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435 (S2203). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image at power-on, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435), , And the start address of the power-on variation image area 435b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 in accordance with this transfer instruction. Transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 435b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 in the process of S2203, the simple image display flag 433a is then displayed. Is turned on (S2204). Thus, while the simple image display flag 433a is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 434 to transfer the image (see S3002 in FIG. 60A).

  The simple image display flag 433a is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B), a simple command is used so that the image at the time of image insertion (the main image at the time of image insertion and the image at the time of image insertion) is drawn. Determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. 49B) and simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 49B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND flash memory 434a is used for the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is stored due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 281, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 314. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 281, the player enters the first entrance 264 (start winning), and the start instruction of the variation effect is controlled by the main controller 310 through the sound lamp control. If it is via the device 313, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 29B and 29C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been reliably performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 281 but the character ROM 434 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since this pachinko machine 200 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after the power is turned on, Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2204, interrupt permission is set (S2205). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2205, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 314, the MPU 431 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 433 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 35) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, the image controller 437 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 437 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 437 and transmitted to the MPU 431. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 437 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. Therefore, the image controller 437 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 49B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 433a is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 433a is not on. If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 281, a command determination process (S 2402) is executed, and then a display setting process (S 2403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 313 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 433b and is opposed to the set display data table. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433d. When the continuous notice command is stored, the additional data table for continuous notice corresponding to the continuous notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 433c.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 310 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, the variation effect selected by the main control device 310 and the sound lamp control device 313 and the aspect of the continuous notice effect are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the aspect The image drawing can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2403), in the third symbol display device 281 based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table buffer 433c by the command determination process (S2402) or the like. Next, the contents of an image for one frame to be displayed are specifically specified. Further, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 433a is on, the image controller 437 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 435. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 433b is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 434 to the normal use for the image controller 437 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 433d. When a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a of the video RAM 436 is set, and when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 313, the image controller 437 is continuously informed. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2405) are used. 35. The drawing list shown in FIG. 35 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 437 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display device 314 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 433, and an update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time shortage hit, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out) The stop type table corresponding to “completely off” and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag is on (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 29 on the third symbol display device 281, the simple command determination process (S 2408) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S 2409) is executed, and the process of S 2404 is executed. Migrate to

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54, details of the above-described command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 50, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2503).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S2504: Yes), the held ball number command processing is performed. Is executed (S2505), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2505) will be described. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This on-hold ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display on-hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, the new reserved ball number command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display reserved ball number command has been processed in the ON state is turned on (S2601), and then the display hold command is held. The number of reserved balls included in the ball number command is acquired (S2602). In the process of S2602, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the hold ball number information is acquired from the last stored hold ball number command. Thereby, the newest number of reserved balls can be acquired.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to other numbers of reserved balls are turned off. (S2603), the process returns to the command determination process.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, when the new reserved ball number command flag is ON, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determined flag set to ON is referred to by referring to the number determination flag. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 so that the reserved image data is expanded.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the processing of S2504 that there is no display pending ball number command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S2506: Yes), the confirmation command processing is executed (S2507), and the processing returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51B, details of the confirmation command process (S2507) will be described. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 314.

  In the confirmation command process (S2507), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2403) that the display confirmation command has been received in the on state is set to on (S2611), this process ends, and the command determination Return to processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is performed so that the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 281. Execute. In addition, when the display of the variable effect is processed and the confirmed command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Display setting processing is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S2506 (S2506: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demonstration command (S2508) (S2508: Yes), the demonstration command processing is executed (S2509), and the processing returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the demo command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51C is a flowchart showing the demo command process. This demonstration command processing executes processing corresponding to the display demonstration command received from the sound lamp control device 314.

  In the demo command process (S2509), first, a display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 432a and set in the display data table buffer 433b (S2621). Next, the contents of the additional data table buffer 433c are cleared by writing None data, and in the demonstration display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Since the drawing of the image is defined so that the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 432a, the None data is written in the transfer data table buffer 433d to clear the contents (S2622). ).

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration display is set in the time counter 433g (S2623), and the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the on state on the third symbol display device 281 is set to on, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the on state. The confirmation display flag shown is set to OFF, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2625), the demonstration command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 433e initialized by the process of S2624 is updated and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 433b by the process of S2621 is updated. Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 433e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 281 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect specified in the display data table for demonstration is counted using the time counter 433g in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration display is set by the process of S2623, and the process of S2625 is performed. Based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the step, when the demonstration setting in the demonstration display data table is determined to be finished by the time of the display setting control timing counter 433g, the next presentation to be displayed Then, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the processing of S2508 that there is no display demo command (S2508: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S2510) (S2510: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S2511), and the processing returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52A, details of the variation pattern command processing (S2511) will be described. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 314.

  In the variation pattern command process (S2509), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 432a. Is set in the display data table buffer 433b (S2631).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main control device 310, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 433b.

  If a display data table for change corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually controlled by the main control. If instructed by the device 310, the main controller 310 displays a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 281. ) Will be received, and the changing 3rd symbol will be suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 433b, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when a variation effect having a variation time is instructed by the main controller 310, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 433b is completed, a confirmation command from the main controller 310 is obtained. The display setting process controls the display of the third symbol display device 281 so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, so the player fluctuates the restart effect. The change of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 281 without any sense of incongruity until the stop display of the 3rd symbol is confirmed as a consistent production. It is possible to keep watching.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 432a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 433d (S2632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing None data in the additional data table buffer 433c (S2633).

  After that, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2631 is turned on, and others The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the change display data table is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2634, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b corresponds to. Can be judged. In the display setting process, it is determined whether there is a contradiction between the variation pattern of the set variation display data table and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later. As will be described later, a display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 433b.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b by the processing of S2631, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 433g (S2635). The pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638). To return to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer display 433e initialized by the processing of S2636 is updated, and the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 433b by the processing of S2631. The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 281 and at the same time specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e. The image data of the transferred data is extracted, and the image controller 437 is set so that the image data of the sprite necessary in the set display data table for change is transferred in advance from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. Control.

  Further, in the display setting process, using the time counter 433g in which the time data corresponding to the demo display is set by the process of S2635, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is counted, and the variation display data is displayed. When it is determined that the variation effect in the table has been completed, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 310, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within the time, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, the display Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. In contrast, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command process corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for use is executed later, and the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to off by overwriting, as in the process of S2637. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, so the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for execution is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 433b by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the display data table for change by overwriting as in the process of S2631. Can do. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S2510 (S2510: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation type command (S2511: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2513), and the processing returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52B, details of the stop type command process (S2513) will be described. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 314.

  In the variation type command processing, first, the stop corresponding to the stop type information (either 15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time shortage hit, front / rear reach reach, reach other than front / rear reach or complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command. The type table is determined (S2641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed on the display device 281 is finally set (S2642).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2643).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. As offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2642. In the task process (S2404) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2643, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 435d of the resident video RAM 435 as described above.

  After the process of S2643, the comparison flag is then turned on (S2644), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, there is no contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display table set by the variation pattern command setting processing and the stop symbol set by the processing of S2642. If there is a contradiction, a display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 433b as described later.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 310, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. There is also the possibility of being interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2641, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2642.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, even if it is actually off, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the player In other words, it is misunderstood that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200 is a big hit, and there is a fear that the reliability of the pachinko machine 200 is lowered. On the other hand, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a big hit, the stop symbol of complete disconnection is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2512 (S2512: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a continuous notice command in the unprocessed commands ( If there is a continuous notice command (S2514) (S2514: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53A, details of the continuous notice command processing (S2515) will be described. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing continuous notice command processing. This continuous notice command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the continuous notice command received from the audio lamp control device 314.

  In the continuous notice command processing, first, a new continuous notice command flag that notifies the transfer setting process (S2405) that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2651). Next, an additional data table for continuous notice corresponding to the continuous notice image type (any of “bubble”, “egg”, “chick”, “chicken” and “chicken group”) indicated by the continuous notice command is determined. The determined additional data table for continuous notice is read from the data table storage area 432a and set in the additional data table buffer 433c.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, for the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the continuous notice corresponding to the additional data table for continuous notice stored in the additional data table buffer 433c by the process of S2652 is displayed. The display content of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 281 is specified so that the notice effect is additionally displayed.

  After that, among the continuous notice determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type, the continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on, and the continuous notice image types corresponding to other continuous notice image types are turned on. The advance notice determination flag is set to OFF (S2652), this continuous notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous notice command flag set by the process of S2651 is turned on, a predetermined continuous notice additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433c by the continuous notice command process. The continuous notice type corresponding to the additional data table for continuous notice set in the additional data table buffer 433c is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set by the processing of S2652. Then, the image controller 437 is instructed to transfer image data necessary to display the specified continuous notice type.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the processing of S2514 that there is no continuous notice command (S2514: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). ), If there is a rear image change command (S2516: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53B, details of the rear image change command processing (S2517) will be described. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 314.

  In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S2405) of a back image change accompanying reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S2661). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2662), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2661 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2662. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 437 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is defined that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the task image processing is performed based on the back image discrimination flag set in S2662. The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 222 within 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It can also be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2662, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 200, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 200.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command in the processing of S2516 (S2516: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a frame button operation command (S2518) (S2518: Yes), the frame button operation command process is executed (S2519), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the frame button operation command process (S2519) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing frame button operation command processing. This frame button operation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the audio lamp control device 314.

  In the frame button operation command, a frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (S2671), the process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S2671, the frame button was operated while the super reach selection screen was displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to the display data table for change. Is detected, the process of updating the type of super reach to be displayed later is executed. This allows the player to select a favorite super reach effect.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in step S2518 that there is no frame button operation command (S2518: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S2520). If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2521), and the process returns to S2501.

  Details of the error command process (S2521) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 314.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2681). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2682). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2681, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2682 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2682, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that players and hall personnel can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S2520 (S2520: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2522), and the processing returns to S2501.

  In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), The processing of S2502 to S2522 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2501 to S2522 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2408) executed when the simple image display flag 433a is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 29 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display table confirmation command, the display variation pattern Only commands and display stop type commands are extracted, and processing corresponding to each command is confirmed command processing (see FIG. 51 (b)), variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52 (a)), and stop type. Command processing (see FIG. 52C) is executed, and for other commands, processing for discarding is performed without executing processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 433b in the processing of S2631. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 435a and the power-on variation moving image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, in the process of S2632, the process of writing None data to the transfer data table buffer 433b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, details of the display setting process (S2403) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described. First, FIGS. 55 and 56 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 55, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2701). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2701: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S2702 to S2710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S2702), and then S2703 to S2710. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2703). If the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2703: Yes), the display is performed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2704).

  Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 313 is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the processing of the number of reserved balls for display. This is a process for developing image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 (see FIG. 25). The reserved image data to be displayed in () is expanded (S2751). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the developed reserved image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new reserved ball number command is set to OFF (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the hold image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2703: No), then Then, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2705). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S2706).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 281 to display a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to and all error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 281 is developed (S2761).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S2705: No), then the frame button It is determined whether or not the operation flag is on (S2707). If the frame button operation flag is on (S2707: Yes), frame button operation processing is executed (S2708).

  Here, the details of the frame button operation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the frame button operation process. This process is performed when the player operates the frame button 222 while the selection screen for selecting the super reach display mode is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281. This is a process for selecting an aspect.

  In the frame button operation processing, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S2771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 433b. The change set in the V interrupt process executed last time is displayed. When the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the sprite for the super reach selection screen based on the display data table, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  If it is determined in the process of S2772 that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772: No), the frame button operation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing in S2772 that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each super reach display mode is set. Among them, the super reach type flag is updated so that only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on and the other super reach type flags are set to off according to a predetermined order (S2773). Return to the display setting process.

  In this embodiment, when specifying the super reach display of the mode selected by the player in the display data table for change, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is specified for each address. In the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S2712, which will be described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach display mode with the super reach type flag turned on are extracted. Thereby, in the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) corresponding to the selected super reach display mode is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the like are necessary for each sprite. Since various parameters are set, the super-reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the selected display mode.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the frame button operation processing (S2708) or in the processing of S2707, if it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, is off (S2707: No), then comparison is performed. It is determined whether or not the flag is on (S2709). If the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), comparison processing is executed (S2710).

  Here, the details of the comparison process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process is performed when the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b is based on the display variation pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is inconsistent. In order to change the effect to a special variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 is received via the sound lamp control device 313. It is processing of.

  In the comparison processing, first, the data table determination flag set to the ON state is identified from the data table determination flags, and the fluctuation stored in the display data table buffer 433b is determined from the identified data table determination flag. The display data table type is specified (S2781). Next, among the stop symbol determination flags, the stop symbol determination flag set to the on state is specified, and the set stop symbol is specified from the specified stop symbol determination flag (S2782).

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the classification | category of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation specified by the process of S2781 and the stop symbol specified by the process of S2782 match (S2783). As described above, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern. For each variation pattern, for out-of-use use, common use for 15R decisive jackpot / short-time jackpot, for 15R probability variation jackpot, for 2R probability variation jackpot ··and so on. Therefore, the process of S2783 determines that these do not match, for example, when the stop symbol is set as a jackpot symbol even though the variation display data table corresponds to the variation pattern for losing. .

  If it is determined that there is a match in the process of S2783 (S2783: Yes), the process proceeds to S2788, the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2783: No), first, the special variation display data table in which the special variation is defined is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table are set. Each of the contents is cleared by writing None data in the buffer 433d (S2784).

  Next, a stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as “3”, “4”, “1” from the left column) is turned on, and a stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to another stop symbol is turned on. Is set to OFF (S2785), and time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect is set in the time counter 433g (S2786). In the special variation effect, as described above, the third symbol is changed at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 is received via the audio lamp control device 313. Since it is displayed, the production time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes). Accordingly, the time counter 433g is set to 3 minutes (180000 milliseconds) ÷ 20 milliseconds = 9000 as time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect.

  The pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  As described above, when the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 433b based on the display change pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display are inconsistent, Since the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 433b, a special variation effect in which the third symbol continuously fluctuates is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Since the special stop symbol is set as the stop time symbol, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main controller 310 is received via the sound lamp controller 313, the special stop symbol is received. Can be fixedly displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Here, when the variation effect pattern instructed from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed when the variation effect is stopped, the display control device 314 causes the main control device to There is a possibility that the result of the lottery performed in 310 cannot be correctly reflected to perform the variation effect or the final display effect. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 200, a special variation effect is performed in such a case, and a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 after the variation display. Even if the result of the lottery in 310 is out of place, it is possible to prevent the jackpot confirmed display effect from being erroneously performed on the third symbol display device 281. Even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, if the lottery result in the main control device 310 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the finalized display a special stop symbol, even if the finalized display is off, it can be suggested to the player that the pachinko machine 200 may be in a big hit state, The pachinko machine 200 is in a big hit state despite the fact that the confirmation display is off, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the comparison process (S2708) or in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, that is, is off (S2709: No), then the process proceeds to S2711. To do.

  In S2711, pointer update processing is executed (S2711). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing is performed by the corresponding drawing contents or transfer from the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 433b, additional data table buffer 433c, and transfer data table buffer 433d. This is a process for updating the pointer 433e for designating the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data is to be acquired.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 433e (S2791). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 433e is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 433e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 433e by the processing of S2791, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 433e is End information. Is discriminated (S2792). As a result, if it is End information (S2792: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, the pointer 433e has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is a demonstration display data table or a restart display data table (S2793), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer is set to 1 (S2794), and the time corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. The data is set in the time counter 433g (S2795), and the process proceeds to S2797. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration or the restart display data table, so that the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 281. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2793, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is neither the display data table for demonstration nor the restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 433e The value is subtracted by 1 (S2796), and the process proceeds to S2797. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration and the restart display data table, for example, a display data table for change or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b. Since the drawing contents of the previous address in which End information is written are always expanded, the third symbol display device 281 displays the image in a state stopped at the last image defined by the display data table. be able to.

  As a result of the processing of S2792, when it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 433e by the processing of S2791 is not End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, S2793 to S2795 Is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2797.

  In the process of S2797, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is turned on (S2797). If the confirmed command flag is not turned on and is turned off (S2797: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display setting is finished. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2797: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313, and therefore the display data table buffer. The value of the pointer 433e is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 433b (S2798), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S2799) to return to the display setting process. Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

  Returning to FIG. 55, after the pointer update process, the address indicated by the pointer 433e updated by the pointer update process from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table buffer 433c. The drawing contents are expanded (S2712). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S2712 together with the hold image and the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined. If None data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 433c is cleared with None data, the None data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 433c.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter g (S2713), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 433g after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). If the value of the time counter 433g is 1 or more (S2714: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 433g is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 433b, a confirmation command (display confirmation command for display) is sent from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 314 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is ON (S2715).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2715: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 310 via the audio lamp control device 314. The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the contents are cleared by writing None data to the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d (S2716). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display is set in the time counter 433g (S2717), and the value of the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to off (S2719), and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the 0 state is set to on (S2720). (S2721), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when a display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 433b, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b to the confirmed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 431 is not subjected to a great load. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses after the start of. In the task process (S2404), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2721 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2715, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2715: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2721 shown in FIG. 56 to determine whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2722). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S2723), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 433b (S2724), and then time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the time counter 433g (S2725). Then, the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2726), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2727), and the V interrupt process is terminated.

  By this, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  It should be noted that the branch condition of S2722: Yes is when the confirmed display effect is being performed. In this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d are obtained by the process of S2717. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the processing of S2724, the clear processing of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 431 can be reduced.

  In the processing of S2722, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2722: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2728). If the demonstration display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 281 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2728, when the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S2728: No), the result of determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the variation effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the change effect, the display data table for change corresponding to the change effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b in order to start the restart effect. Accordingly, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has become a predetermined value (S2730).

  If the restart timer counter is not a predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d are each set with None data. The contents are cleared by writing (S2731). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 433g (S2732), the value of the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2732), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device, a confirmation command (from the main control device 310 is transmitted via the audio lamp control device 313 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. When the display confirmation command is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As described above, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 281 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device 281 to display the third symbol. If it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the stop is displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  In addition, after the last drawing content prescribed | regulated by the restart display data table is expand | deployed, the drawing content is expand | deployed again from the head of the restart display data table by the above-mentioned pointer update process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 281 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 313 or a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 433a is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, when a confirmation command (confirmation command for display) is received from the main control device 310 via the audio lamp control device 313 after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, It has been specified that one of the images (figure 29 (b) and (c)) of the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time is stopped and displayed. Processing for setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 433i is performed. In addition, after the production time of the fluctuating effect based on the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the reception of the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received from the main control device 310 via the audio lamp control device 313 is not permitted. In this case, the display data table buffer 433b is set to a display data table that specifies that the variation effect of the variation image at power-on is restarted.

  Further, in the comparison process, the variation pattern instructed by the display variation pattern command is compared with the stop type instructed by the display stop type. c)) is set.

  Next, the details of the transfer setting process (S2405) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 433a is on (S3001). If the simple image display flag 433a is on (S3001: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. The process is executed (S3002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is set to the image controller 437. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 433a is not on as a result of the processing of S3001, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 435. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 431 of the display control apparatus 314, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 437 (S3101), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3101: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 437 has ended (S3102). In the process of S3102, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 437 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S3102 (S3102: No), the image controller continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to S3103. Also, as a result of the process of S3101, when a transfer instruction for untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 437 (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3103.

  In the processing of S3103, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 435 has been transferred (S3103). A transfer instruction to the image controller 437 is set so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information related to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 437 in the drawing process, and the image controller 437 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 437 to the resident video RAM 436. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 434 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 435), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 435 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 437 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S3103 (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 433a is set to OFF (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 50 to 54) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 55 to 59) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 281 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S3001: No in FIG. 60A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 431 performs all the resident functions to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Then, the MPU 431 controls to keep the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 435 without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to 435 by the resident video RAM 435 is resident in the resident video RAM 435 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the display controller 314 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435 while using the image controller. At 437, image drawing processing can be performed. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 435 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main controller 310, an audio lamp controller 313, and a display controller 314. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a, various operations performed by the player at an arbitrary timing The responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3003), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 433e updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 433d by the pointer update process (S2711) of the display setting process (S2403) executed previously. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3202). If the acquired information is transfer data information (S3202: Yes), the character ROM 434 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 433 (first storage address) and the final address (storage source final address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436). In step S3203, a transfer start flag indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3204), and the process proceeds to step S3205.

  In the process of S3202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but None data (S3202: No), the processes of S3203 and S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 437 after the previous transfer process has ended (S3205). If the transfer instruction has been set (S3205: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 437 has ended (S3206).

  In the process of S3206, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 437 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3206 (S3206: No), the image controller 437 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to S3207. Also, as a result of the process of S3205, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 437 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3205: No), the process proceeds to S3207.

  In the process of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207). If the transfer start flag is on (S3207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3208), the image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3207: No), it is then determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209).

  If the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command has been processed and the additional data table for continuous notice for the continuous notice effect has been set in the additional data table buffer 733c. Therefore, after the new continuous notice command flag is set to OFF (S3210), the image data of the continuous notice image corresponding to the continuous notice determination flag in the ON state among the continuous notice determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type. Is specified (S3211), and the start address of the character ROM 434 (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are specified. After the image data indicated by the information is set as the transfer target image, S3216 The process proceeds to.

  In the processing of S3209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but off (S3209: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3212). If the back image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3212), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of character ROM 434 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state, and transfer The head address of the destination (ordinary video RAM 436) is specified (S3214), and the image data indicated by the specified various pieces of information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S3216.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 436. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S3216, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 436 (S3216). The determination in the process of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 433h. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is read from the stored image determination flag 433h, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is stored in the normal video RAM 436. If it is determined that the image is stored, and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 436.

  If the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 436 as a result of the processing in S3216 (S3216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. The normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 314 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 440. it can.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 436 as a result of the processing of S3216 (S3216: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image is set (S3217). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 437 in the drawing process, and the image controller 437 is based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. In addition, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 437 to the normal video RAM 436. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 436), and transfer destination (transfer here). The head address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 437 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431.

  After the process of S3217, the stored image discrimination flag 433h is updated (S3218), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image discrimination flag 433h is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to “on” and in the same sub-area of the image storage area 436a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous notice command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and the continuous notice image indicated by the continuous notice command is handled. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table 433c, the image data of the continuous preview image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 435 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 435c can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 313, and the display data table is displayed. Since the corresponding transfer data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, the sprite image data used in the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 at a desired timing.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a until drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 436a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in sprite units, the transfer of the image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 35 is generated (S3301). That is, in the process of S3301, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. Further, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process, the head address (storage source head address) and the last address of the character ROM 434 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. (Storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are additionally written.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 435 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 431 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 433i are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 433i is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 433i is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 436b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 436c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands it onto the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information by overwriting. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 434 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436), and the image data stored from the storage source top address to the storage source last address are sequentially read out from the character ROM 434 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 437a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 436 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 436 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 431 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 437 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal on the third symbol display device 281. Send to. As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3302, the drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated (S3303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V-interrupt signal executed by the MPU 431 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 49) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the image drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281. At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are replaced with either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 of the second embodiment, the display control device 314 is used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 313. A display data table is selected, read from the data table storage area 432a, stored in the display data table buffer 433b, and the pointer 433e is initialized to zero. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, 1 is added to the pointer 433e, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e, A drawing list (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, is created by specifying the contents of the image to be drawn, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 433e, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 431 in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 313. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 431 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since the start and execution processing of a complicated and enormous program is enormous, the processing capacity of the display control device 314 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect as described above, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 200, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents must be changed from moment to moment based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. Such a display data table corresponding to each effect cannot be provided. As described above, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 200 is configured to determine an effect to be displayed in advance on the third symbol display device 281 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313, an effect image (for example, to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281) In the case where another effect image (for example, a continuous notice effect image) is displayed in addition to the change effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be displayed is added to the additional data table buffer 433c. By setting, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Accordingly, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are five types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, display data that is defined by adding other effect images for each original effect image. If a table is prepared separately, 32 × 5 = 160 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, like the pachinko machine 200, a data table corresponding to another effect image is separately defined as an additional data table. Thus, 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 432a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 432a, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

  Moreover, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 433b by prescribing another effect image to be added and displayed as an additional data table like the present pachinko machine 200, Even when display of other effect images to be displayed additionally is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. By simply setting in the data table buffer 433c, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

  Since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 433c. While updating the pointer 433e for each time from the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 310, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 313 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentations from a small number of data tables.

  In the pachinko machine 200, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. The image controller 437 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device can be displayed. In particular, the image data of the image to be displayed frequently or the image data of the image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310, the sound lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, etc. Since it is resident in the RAM 435, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from various operations performed by the player at an arbitrary timing until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200, when a display data table to be used is selected in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313, it is used in an effect defined by the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435, and transfer data that defines the transfer timing thereof. A table is set in the transfer data table 433d, and every time the pointer 433e is updated, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e is obtained. , Its turn It transmits the data information to the image controller 437 by the transfer instruction and drawing list.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a until drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 436a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 436 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 281 even if the character ROM 434 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND flash memory 434a is used for the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 due to the slow reading speed. Although it takes a lot of time to be transferred to the resident video RAM 435, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the main image at the time of power-on. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the hall related person is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The main image can be confirmed when the power is turned on.

  Therefore, the display control device 310 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third display device 218, so that the operation of the pachinko machine 200 is started without any problem by power-on. You can check immediately. Therefore, the use of the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 434 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  The “drawing content” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “drawing information” described in the claims, and “sprite type”, “back surface type”, “design type offset” described in the above embodiment. "Corresponds to" specific information "described in the claims, and" drawing list "described in the above embodiment corresponds to" instruction information "described in the claims, and described in the above embodiment "Sprite (display object) data storage RAM type and address" corresponds to "image instruction information" described in the claims, and "transfer data information" described in the above embodiment Corresponds to the “transfer instruction information” described in the range. Further, the “variation effect”, “demonstration effect”, “determined display effect”, and “restart effect” described in the above embodiment correspond to the “display type” described in the claims, and The “variation effect” described corresponds to the “dynamic display effect” described in the claims, and the “continuous notice effect” described in the above embodiment is the “second display type” described in the claims. "Display data table" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "first specified information" described in the claims, and "additional data table" described in the above embodiments is Corresponding to the “second prescribed information” described in the scope, the “transfer data table” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “third prescribed information” described in the claims. The “3rd symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims, and “15R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, “short time” described in the above embodiment. “Big hit” corresponds to “predetermined game value” recited in the claims. Further, the “determining command” described in the embodiment corresponds to the “first command” described in the claims, and the “variation pattern command” described in the embodiment is described in the claims. The “stop type command” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “third command” described in the claims.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187, reads the image data from the character ROM 187, and transfers the image data to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the MPU 181 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 187, and the image controller 181 receives the transfer command and transfers the image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. You may go. In this case, the image data is stored in the address of the character ROM 187 storing the image data to be transferred, the transfer destination video RAM (resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190), and the transfer destination video RAM. The power address is specified in the transfer command transmitted by the MPU 181, and the image controller 188 reads the image data stored in the address position of the character ROM 187 specified by the transfer command, and specifies the specified transfer destination. The read image data may be stored in a designated address area of the video RAM. In this case, the image controller 188 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 187 in the buffer RAM 188a. When the image controller 188 does not use the transfer destination video RAM, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is stored. May be stored in the video RAM of the transfer destination.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the MPU 431 transmits the image data transfer data information to the image controller 437 in the drawing list, and the image controller 431 receives the transfer data information and receives the transfer data information from the character ROM 434. Although the case where image data is transferred to the RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the MPU 431 may directly access the character ROM 434, read image data from the character ROM 434, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 431 from the character ROM 434 is temporarily stored in the buffer ROM 437a, and then the MPU 431 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer ROM 437a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is unused is determined by the image controller 437 accessing the resident video RAM 435 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 437 is accessing (i.e., in use) the normal video RAM 436. ) May be provided in the image controller 437 and the MPU 431 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 437 and the resident video RAM 435 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 437 and the normal video RAM 436 is monitored by the MPU 431, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 437 starts access to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 or ends access, the MPU 431 notifies the MPU 431 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 431 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 437 scans the third symbol display device 281, whether the scanning is during the blank period (see FIG. 11), the MPU 431 confirms the driving state of the image controller 437, or the image Ascertained by a notification from the controller 437, if the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 435, 436, 536 is unused. As a result, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 281 of the image controller 437 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the image controller 437 is not in use.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not manage the video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, respectively. In an address system used in common with the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, different video areas may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 189 or 435 or normal video RAM 190 or 436) to be accessed from the MPUs 181 and 431 to the image controllers 188 and 437. The image controller 188, 437 can determine whether the area specified by the address is for the resident video RAM 189, 435 or the normal video RAM 190, 436 simply by specifying. That is, when the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM are designated from the MPUs 181 and 431 to the image controllers 188 and 437, the address set in the common address system is simply designated. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of an instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the second embodiment, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437, the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data is simply set in the common address system without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination using the designated address, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROMs 187 and 434 are directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) to which the MPUs 181 and 431 and the image controller are connected has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The ROMs 187 and 434 may be directly connected to the image controllers 188 and 437. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROMs 187 and 434 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via the bridge circuit. You may connect and provide. By providing this bridge circuit, an existing image controller 188, 437 or an internal bus (bus line 440) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as a character ROM can be used as it is, and a NAND flash memory can be used. Character ROMs 187 and 434 configured by 187a and 434a can be connected. Even if the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected via the image controllers 188 and 437 and a bridge circuit, the character ROMs 187 and 434 may be directly accessible from the MPUs 181 and 431.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROMs 187 and 434 are configured by the NAND flash memories 187a and 434a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a large-capacity and inexpensive nonvolatile storage unit, for example, Or a hard disk or the like. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control devices 81 and 314 have the configuration described in the above embodiments, so that an image can be displayed at a time when it is desired to be displayed. Can be displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are connected to the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , 437 may be directly connected to an internal bus (bus line 440) to be connected. When the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via the bridge circuit, resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be connected to the bridge circuit. . If the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are connected to the bridge circuit, the existing image controllers 188 and 437 or the internal bus (bus line 440) are not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435. However, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 can be easily provided in the display control devices 81 and 314.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display control devices 81 and 314 are provided with one resident video RAM 189 and 435 and one normal video RAM 190 and 436 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is limited to this. More video RAMs may be provided instead. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a multiport RAM may be used.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are configured by different memories has been described. And the normal area, and the same contents as the resident video RAM 189 and 435 and the normal video RAM 190 and 436 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type is appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281. It may be done. In this case, an image corresponding to an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 101 or the sound lamp control device 313 or other input from the outside. Preferably, the data is resident at least in the resident video RAM 189,435.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROMs 187 and 434 is transferred to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 so as to be resident. May be transferred to the resident video RAM 189, 435. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROMs 187 and 434 in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435, the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 store the drawing image data obtained by the drawing by the image controllers 188 and 437. It may be used as a dedicated memory for storing.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the contents of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are not overwritten while the power is turned on and is retained is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data to be resident in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 is greatly different based on the command received from the control device 313. May be overwritten and updated. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 is changed. The image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 189 and 435 when the power is turned on, and is not updated when the other resident image is updated, but is held in the resident video RAM 189 and 435. You may keep going. In addition, while displaying the transition image, the MPUs 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187 and 434 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is transferred via the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a. The resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be transferred while they are not used (that is, during a period when image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPUs 181 and 431 transmit image data transfer instructions (transfer data information) to be newly resident to the image controllers 188 and 437, and the image controllers 188 and 437 The image data to be resident is read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 according to the transfer command (transfer data information), and the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are not used (that is, the image corresponding to the transition image) via the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a. It may be transferred during a period when data is not read out.

  When the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is previously transferred from the character ROMs 187 and 434 to the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, and the images stored in the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are stored. The transition image may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 using the data. While the transition image is displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187 and 434 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 188a. You may make it do. Alternatively, the image controllers 188 and 437 that have received a transfer instruction for image data to be resident from the MPUs 181 and 431 access the character ROMs 187 and 434 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the buffer. You may make it transfer via RAM188a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a are provided in the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and may be provided outside the image controllers 188 and 437. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 440). When the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, image data can be transferred from the character ROMs 187 and 434 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 through the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, so that an internal bus (where data signals are frequently exchanged) The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the bus line 440).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a is set to one block of the NAND flash memories 187a and 434a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this and may be set as appropriate. May be. For example, among the scanning period of the display screen included in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281, a period during which a blank area that is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed is scanned (blank period) ), The storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 is performed in the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189, 190, 435, 436, and 536 occurring in this blank period. This can be done reliably by using.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 188a, 437a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image stored in the resident video RAM 189 or 435 or the normal video RAM 190 or 436 from another buffer RAM. You may comprise so that data may be transferred. Also, the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from another area to the resident video RAM 189 435 or the normal video RAM 190 436. In any case, the image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is written into the buffer RAM, and the image data written in the buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436. Can be processed in parallel, so that the time required for the processing can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 after power-on has been described. The image data corresponding to the image may be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used to display the main image at power-on on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the image data 187 is resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189. Image data to be transferred can be transferred. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 189. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is supplied from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation from the character ROM 434. Although the case of transferring to the image area 435b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 after power-on. Thus, the character ROM 434 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 436. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 435. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 435, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 435. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the first embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 via the buffer RAM 188a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image is not resident from the character ROM 187 via the buffer RAM 188a. The video RAM 189 may be directly transferred to the main image area 189a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 after power-on, and auxiliary display is performed using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 190. The image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 by displaying the main image when the power is turned on in the unit 65. In this case, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character RAM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without going through the buffer RAM 188a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 188a.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 435 via the buffer RAM 437a. Although the case of transferring to the time-varying image area 435b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image is transferred. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on variation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435 without going through the buffer RAM 437a. May be. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power-on stored in the normal video RAM 436 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 435 is used. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without passing through the buffer RAM 437a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 437a.

  In the first embodiment, the display control device 81 has been described with respect to changing the rear image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101. In addition to this, Alternatively, an operation button that can change the back image of the auxiliary display unit 65 by the player is provided in the slot machine 10, and the back image is changed when the operation button is operated by the player. May be. Specifically, when an operation button is operated by the player, an output signal output from the operation button is input to the input / output port 186 of the display control device 81, and the MPU 181 receives an input from the operation button. When the player confirms that the operation button has been operated, the back image is determined to be changed, and image data corresponding to the back image to be displayed after the change stored in the back image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189 is obtained. It may be used to instruct the image controller 188 to draw an image. Accordingly, after the player operates the operation button, the rear image after the change is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data stored in the rear image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189. be able to. Therefore, even when the character ROM 187 is configured using the NAND flash memory 187a having a reading speed, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the changed rear image in response to the player's operation immediately. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 222, the voice lamp control device 313 generates a back image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 314 changes the back image. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the command and the frame button operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 313 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 200 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 310, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 314, based on the back image change command or the game state command, the back image or the super reach effect mode can be changed according to the game state. In addition, the display control device 314 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 200 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. If the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c.

  Further, the display control device 314 may change not only the rear image based on the rear image change command but also the rear image according to the display data table and the transfer data time table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in accordance with transfer data information described in the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, a new back image is added to the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in which the back images A to C are stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that the image data is stored, or a new area is created in a different area from the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in which the back images A to C are stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the back image is stored. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer image data corresponding to the original back image, so the processing of the display control device 314 is performed. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, when the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the main controller 101 and a sensor error is detected by the main controller 101, the error command Is transmitted to the display control device 81 so that the display control device 81 immediately displays an error message on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 detects a sensor error. When it is configured to detect presence / absence and a sensor error is detected in the display control device 81 You may immediately display the error message to the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data that has been resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM189. As a result, transmission / reception of an error command from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 is not necessary, so that an error message can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 earlier.

  In the second embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the sound lamp control device 313, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 313, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 314. Thus, although the case where the display control device 314 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 281 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is sent to the main control device 310 The vibration control error may be detected by the main control device 310, and an error command for notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to either the sound lamp control device 313 or the display control device 314. . When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313, the sound lamp control device 313 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 314 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 may be input to the display control device 314, and the display control device 314 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 55). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 57B) when the above is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 earlier.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 has been described. It may be attached to the back side. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 310, the sound lamp control device 313, and the display control device 314. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 310, if the main controller 310 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314 via the sound lamp control device 313 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 313, if it is determined that the sound lamp control device 313 applies a magnetic field to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314. Then, in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is resident. The display control device 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218 when receiving an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 310 or the sound lamp control device 313. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the display control device 314 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313. In addition to turning on the error occurrence flag, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 by setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, the display control device 314 receives the error command from the main control device 310 or the sound lamp control device 313, or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, and then stores the character ROM 434. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 434a, the error message image for informing the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 425 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 281. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 281. Can be deterred.

  In the first embodiment, the case in which the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 are driven by the display control device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 provide the auxiliary display unit 65. You may comprise so that it may drive by the audio | voice lamp control apparatus provided separately from the display control apparatus 81 to drive. In this case, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received by the sound lamp control device, and the display control device 81 is based on the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device based on the command from the main control device 101. The auxiliary display unit 64 may be controlled. Further, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 may be received by the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may transmit the command to the sound lamp control device in accordance with the received command. By separately providing a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 and an audio lamp control device for driving the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64, the display control device 81 can concentrate on driving control of the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the auxiliary display unit 65 can execute more diverse and complicated image display, and can increase the interest of the player.

  In the first embodiment described above, the configuration including only one type of BB winning is described as a winning mode in which a privilege to shift to the bonus state when the winning is established, but includes a plurality of types of state shifting winning combinations. It is good also as a structure. Further, the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state may be set to a different value depending on the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved. That is, in the process of S604 of the bonus state process (see FIG. 17), the value set in the remaining payout counter may be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which a winning is achieved. In addition, in the process of S606 of the bonus state process (see FIG. 17), when the state command meaning that the game is a BB game is set, the type of the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved is also set. May be. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 81, the effect performed by the auxiliary display part 65, the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 can be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is established.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described where the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state that is shifted to when the BB winning is established is set to 250 (setting of the remaining payout counter in S604 in FIG. 17). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the value set as the medal payout total number (remaining payout number) may be an arbitrary number within a range determined by law or the like.

  In the first embodiment, in the JAC game that is performed when the gaming state is in the bonus state, the case where the winning probability of the watermelon winning and the bell winning as the small role winning is set higher than the general gaming state is described. However, the winning probability of either the watermelon winning or the bell winning may be set higher than that in the general gaming state. In addition, each winning probability in the bonus state may be determined so that the degree of increase in the winning probability of the watermelon winning with a large number of medal payouts is larger than that of the bell winning. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game can be increased, so that the player can receive a large number of medals with a small number of medals. Further, since medals can be paid out for the total number of medals paid out in a short time, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased also for the hall side. In addition, a bonus-only winning mode that is established only when the gaming state is in the bonus state is set, and the number of medals to be paid out is set to be larger, and the winning probability of the bonus-only winning mode is set higher than other winning modes in the bonus state. You may comprise. Furthermore, winning establishment of this bonus exclusive winning mode may be performed only in the case of three. Thereby, even if it is a case where a bonus game can be performed by 1 or 2 sheets, it is possible for a player to perform a bonus game by 3 sheets.

  In the first embodiment, only when the game is played with one or two medals, that is, when the game is played with one or two medals, the Cherry Bell prize, which is a special small role prize, is won. Although the case where the lottery table is set so as to be established has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the game is played with three medals inserted, that is, the game is played with three In this case, the lottery table may be set so that a cherry bell winning is established. When a game is played with three cards and a Cherry Bell winning is achieved, the number of medals paid out may be three or any other number. Further, the winning probability of winning the cherry bell when the game is played with three cards may be set by a lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB winning, watermelon winning, bell winning, and replay winning. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the Cherry Bell winning is a special small role winning because it is difficult to be established when three Cherry Bell winnings are made.

  Similarly, in the first embodiment, the case where the lottery table is set so that the 7-bell winning, which is a special small role winning, is established only when the game is played by one piece is described. The lottery table may be set so that a 7-bell prize is established even when a game is played with two or three cards. When a 7-bel prize is established by playing a game with two or three, the number of medals paid out may be two or any other number. If a 7-bell prize is established when two cards are used, it is more preferable to set the medal payout number to three. This is because the player can play another game using the three medals, so that the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. . Also, the winning probability of winning 7 bells when a game is played with 3 cards may be set by a lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB winnings, watermelon winnings, bell winnings, and replay winnings. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that a 7-bell prize is won when three cards are put on, so that it is a special small role prize. On the other hand, the winning probability of winning 7 bells when playing a game with 2 cards, together with other winnings including the Cherry Bell prize, is such that the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game is less than 2. It is preferable to be set by a lottery table.

  In the first embodiment, when a game is played with one or two cards, when a watermelon prize or bell prize, which is a normal small part prize, is established, three medal payouts are given as the medal payout number. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other medal payout numbers may be set. In this case, different medal payout numbers may be set for the watermelon win medal payout number and the bell win medal payout number. Further, as the number of medals to be paid out for a watermelon winning or a bell winning at the time of 1 or 2 sheets, a number larger than the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set. Thereby, when a game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the formation of a watermelon prize or a bell prize in which many medals are paid out. In addition, a multiple of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set as the number of medals to be paid out for a watermelon win or a bell win at the time of 1 or 2 wins. As a result, if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, a medals can be obtained simply by playing a game (three-game game) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be paid out as a result of establishing a BB prize is obtained. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game until the end without leaving extra medals. Also, as the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon winning or the bell winning at the time of 1 or 2 sheets, 12 and 6 sheets may be set as in the case of 3 sheets. Thereby, since it is not necessary to change the medal payout number according to the number of bets, an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, the watermelon prize medal payout number may be set to be different for the case of 1 sheet and 2 sheets, and similarly, the case of 1 sheet and 2 sheets Depending on the case, the number of medals to be paid out for the Bell prize may be set to a different number. Further, the medal payout number of at least one of the watermelon winning and the bell winning at the time of putting one may be set to two. Accordingly, the player can enjoy another game while expecting the completion of the Cherry Bell prize in which the two medals are inserted and another three medals are paid out. The winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game with respect to the number of medals inserted is less than 100% when one or two is multiplied. desirable. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a game is played with one or two cards, and three medals are paid out when a Cherry Bell winning is achieved. In this case, as a medal payout number, a multiple (for example, 6 or 9) of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set. . Even after this, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can consume the medals simply by playing a game (three-game game) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected with the establishment of the BB prize is high. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the number of medals to be paid out when a Cherry Bell winning is established at the time of placing one is set to two. As a result, the player can enjoy another game while inserting the two medals and expecting the completion of the Cherry Bell prize in which three more medals are paid out, without leaving any extra medals. You can enjoy the game to the end. In these cases, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number in one game to the medal inserted number is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case is described in which a game is played with one piece and a 7-bell prize is established, so that two medals are paid out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a medal payout number in this case, a multiple (for example, 3, 6, 9, etc.) of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set. As a result, if a 7-bell prize is established, the medals will be consumed just by playing a game (a game with 3 cards) with the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be paid out for many medals after the BB prize is established. Since it can, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. In this case as well, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the first embodiment, when a single-game is played, whether or not to win the Cherry Bell or 7 Bell is selected as a candidate for the winning role, and when the Cherry Bell winning is established, three medals are paid out. Although a case where two medal payouts are made when a 7-bell prize is made has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. If a 7-bell prize is established, 3 medals may be paid out. As a result, when the Cherry Bell winning is achieved, two medals are paid out, so the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell winning that three medals are paid out. However, another game can be enjoyed, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving extra medals. In addition, when the 7-bell prize is established, three medals are paid out, so that the player can play another game while inserting the three medals and expecting the BB prize to be established. Yes, you can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. On the other hand, when a game is played with one piece, it may be configured to determine whether or not only a cherry bell winning is made. As a result, in any case where the number of bets is 1 to 3, 7-bel prize winning is not included as a winning combination, so the index value IV = 5 can be omitted from the lottery table, and the lottery storing the lottery table The storage capacity of the table storage area 105a can be reduced and the processing load of the lottery process can be reduced. In this case, if the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry bell winning is established is set to three, the three medals to be paid out when the cherry bell winning is established, and the player Furthermore, another game can be performed while expecting the establishment of the BB prize, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without extra medals. Also, if the number of medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is established is set to two, the two medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is established, and the player further adds three medals. While expecting the completion of the Cherry Bell prize where medals are paid out, another game can be enjoyed, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving any extra medals. In these cases, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number in one game to the medal inserted number is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%. For example, when a special child role prize for one player does not include a 7-bell prize and only a cherry-bell prize is supported, if the number of medals to be paid out in the cherry-bell prize is set to 3, the winning probability is about 3 It may be set to 1/6, and when the number of medals paid out in the Cherry Bell prize is set to 2, the winning probability may be set to about 1/2.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery table, any one of BB winning, watermelon winning, bell winning, cherry bell winning, 7 bell winning and replay winning is assigned as a winning manner corresponding to the index value IV. In the lottery, the case where any one of these winning modes is set as the winning combination has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a plurality of these winning modes can be selected for one index value IV. When the winning mode is assigned and the winning is confirmed at the one index value IV, a plurality of winning modes assigned to the one index value IV may be simultaneously set as the winning combination. For example, by assigning a BB prize and a Bell prize to one index value IV, a BB prize and a Bell prize may be simultaneously set as a winning combination, or a watermelon prize and a replay prize are assigned to one index value IV. May be assigned as a winning combination at the same time. Here, when a BB winning that is carried over to the next game when a winning is not established and another winning mode (for example, a bell winning) that is not carried over to the next game are set as a winning combination at the same time, The sliding table corresponding to another winning mode (bell winning) that cannot be carried over may be preferentially stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. As a result, it is possible to establish a winning establishment in the other winning modes, and it is possible to carry over the BB winning to the next game and establish a winning establishment. In addition, if a watermelon prize and a replay prize are set at the same time as a winning combination, a slide table is prepared so that either the watermelon prize or the replay prize stops on the active line. You may make it store in the storage area 106b. As the sliding table, the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon winning that is more advantageous to the player than the replay winning can be stopped from the reaching symbol that has reached the base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. If the stop mode is defined to stop at the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon winning, and the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon winning cannot be stopped, the stop is stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the replay winning. It is good to use what the aspect was prescribed | regulated. As a result, a watermelon winning that is more advantageous to the player than a replay winning is established as much as possible, and if a watermelon winning cannot be achieved, a replay winning can be established. In this case, the player can replay without medal insertion.

  In the first embodiment, when a game is played with one card and a 7-bell prize is established and two medals are paid out, the gaming state of the slot machine 10 remains in the general gaming state. The game state of the slot machine 10 may be shifted to the special game state when two cards are played when a game is played with a stack and a 7-bell prize is established and two medals are paid out. And, when the game state is shifted to the 2-game special game state, the lottery table may be configured so that the winning probability of the cherry bell winning mode at the time of 2-game play is set higher than that in the general game state. Good. As a result, when two medals are paid out by winning a 7-bell prize when a single card is placed, the player inserts the two medals and is strong in establishing a Cherry Bell prize where three medals are paid out. You can enjoy another game while expecting it.

  In the first embodiment, when the player is in the general gaming state, the prescribed number of medals bet is set to 1 to 3 and corresponds to either 1 or 2 or 3 The case where the game is configured to start has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The prescribed number of medals bet is set to 1 and 3, and 1 and 3 are multiplied. Only in response to this, the game may be configured to start. As a result, if two medals remain at the player's hand, the player expects that the player will be able to pay out three medals when the Cherry Bell prize is established, and the remaining medals are inserted one by one. And you can entertain a total of at least two games.

  Also, not only in the general gaming state, but also in the bonus state, the prescribed number of medals bet is set to 1 to 3 and can be used for 1-, 2-, 3- The game may be started. Alternatively, even in the bonus state, the prescribed number of medals bet may be set to 1 and 3 and the game may be started in response to 1 and 3 medals. . If a bonus game is played with 1 or 2 cards, the lottery table should be configured so that the winning probability of the Cherry Bell and 7 Bell winnings is set low or the winning probability is zero. Also good. In addition, the lottery table may be configured so that the winning probability of the watermelon winning or the bell winning in the case of 1 and 2 is higher than the winning probability in the general gaming state. In addition, the number of medal payouts for watermelon winning or bell winning for 1 and 2 wins may be set to be larger than the number of medal payouts (3) in the general gaming state. However, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out for each winning mode are set so that the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game in the case of one and two bonuses in the bonus state is smaller than the expected value in the case of three cards. May be set. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the bonus game with three pieces as much as possible. Further, the winning probability and the medal payout number corresponding to each winning mode when the game is played with one or two in the bonus state may be set to be the same as in the general gaming state. In this case, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game to the number of bets is less than 100% for both 1 and 2 medals, so when the game is repeated with 1 or 2 medals, the number of medals However, it decreases. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a bonus game with three cards.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the game is configured not to be limited to the remaining number of medals at hand of the player but to be able to play by one and two in the general gaming state has been described. This is not necessarily limited to this, and only when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is less than three, the winning mode and the winning probability of the first embodiment are multiplied by one and two. Alternatively, the game may be played with the medal payout number. For example, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when determining whether or not the bet number is a specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is confirmed, and the value is 3 If this is the case, by setting the specified number of bets to 3, the game can be played only by multiplying 3 cards. If the value of the credit counter is less than 3, the specified number of bets is set to 1 and By setting the number to two, the game may be performed with the winning mode, the winning probability, and the medal payout number of the first embodiment by multiplying by 1 and by 2. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, the game can always be played with only three medals, so that the medals are consumed quickly and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall can be reliably increased. . On the other hand, if there are fewer than three virtual medals, use one or two medals to win a Cherry Bell prize where three medals are paid out or a 7 bell prize where two medals are paid out. Since the player can aim and play the game, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without leaving an extra.

  In the first embodiment, not only the remaining number of medals at the player's hand, but also in the general gaming state, the winning mode, winning probability and medal payout number of games that are played by 1 and 2 are fixed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when it is determined that there is a start command in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the value of the credit counter (that is, the number of virtual medals) immediately before the start command is temporarily held in the RAM 106. In the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when the one-sheet lottery table (see S406) or the two-sheet lottery table (see S405) is set, or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), the payout determination When performing the process (see S513), if the number of virtual medals immediately before the start command stored temporarily is three or more, the medal payout per game with one or two medals The winning mode, winning so that the expected value of the number is smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning mode, winning probability and medal payout number shown in FIG. The rate and medal payout number may also be set. In this case, the expected value may be reduced by setting the winning probability of the Cherry Bell winning or the 7 Bell winning when the game is played with one or two cards. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, it is possible to play a game with conditions that are much more advantageous when playing a game with 3 cards than when playing a game with 1 or 2 cards. The player starts playing the game with three cards, and the medals are consumed quickly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably increase the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall. On the other hand, when the number of virtual medals immediately before the start command stored temporarily is less than 3, the winning mode shown in FIG. The winning probability and the medal payout number may be set. As a result, when there are less than three virtual medals, one or two medals are used and a 7-bel prize is awarded in which 3 medals are paid out or 2 medals are paid out. Therefore, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without surplus.

  Further, in addition to the two modified examples described above or separately from the two modified examples, when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is two, the above-described FIG. You may comprise so that a game may not be played with the winning aspect shown in 9, the winning probability, and the medal payout number. In this case, it may be configured so that a single-ply game is not performed at all, and the expected value of the number of medals paid out per single-ply game is the winning mode shown in FIGS. The winning mode, the winning probability and the medal payout number may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the win probability and the medal payout number. In the former case, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when it is determined whether or not the bet number is a specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is confirmed. If the number is 2, the set number of bets may be set to 2 so that a game with 1 card cannot be played. In the latter case, when it is determined that there is a start command in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the value of the credit counter (that is, the number of virtual medals) immediately before the start command is temporarily stored in the RAM 106. In the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when the one-sheet lottery table (see S406) is set, or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), a payout determination process (see S513) is performed. In this case, if the number of virtual medals immediately before the start command stored temporarily is two, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game when one is multiplied is shown in FIGS. The winning mode, the winning probability and the medal payout number are set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning mode, the winning probability and the medal payout number shown. It may be. As a result, when only two virtual medals remain, the player can play the game with two. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not three medals are paid out in one game.

  In the first embodiment, even if the game is played with one or two cards when the BB prize winning flag is carried over, the winning mode of the game performed with one or two cards and the winning game Although the case where the probability is configured to be the same as the case where the BB winning winning flag is not carried over has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when setting the one-sheet lottery table (see S406) or the two-sheet lottery table (see S405), the winning flag storage area 106a is carried over from the previous game. If the BB winning winning flag is set, the lottery table may be set so that the probability of losing is high. As a result, if the result of the lottery is lost, since only the BB winning winning flag carried over is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the smooth table setting executed in S310 of the lottery process (see FIG. 14) is set. In the process, a sliding table corresponding to the BB winning can be stored. Therefore, the probability that a BB winning will be established can be increased.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which information related to the number of bets is included in a start command and transmitted from the main control apparatus 101 to the display control apparatus 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is different from the start command. Information regarding the number of bets may be transmitted from the main controller 101 to the display controller 81 by a command. For example, information relating to the number of bets may be transmitted by a dedicated command (hereinafter referred to as “bet number notification command”), or may be transmitted by being included in a lottery result command. When preparing a bet number notification command, in the main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the reception command storage area 185a, and the command is notified of the bet number. If the command is a command, the bet number notification command process is executed. By the bet number notification command process, information regarding the bet number included in the bet number notification command is extracted, and the information regarding the extracted bet number is stored in the bet number storage area. You may make it store in 185b. In addition, when including information on the bet number in the lottery result command, information on the bet number is extracted from the lottery result command and stored in the lottery result command process (see FIG. 20) before the process of S901 is performed. You may make it store in the area 185b. Note that when the information related to the number of bets is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a command different from the start command or the lottery result command, the transmission timing of the command is determined after the start command is transmitted. Preferably before the transmission of. Thereby, in the display control device 81, based on the number of bets placed on the game started by operating the start lever 41 and the result of the lottery performed on the game, the auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, Various aspects of the effects performed by the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65) can be determined, and the player can play a game with various senses of expectation by the effects of the auxiliary effect unit.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the number of bets is one or two is changed to the BB winning mode. In the case where there are a plurality of winning combinations, an auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65) is started so as to preferentially start the BB winning notification effect informing that the BB winning mode is the winning combination. ) Is controlled (see S903 and S904 in FIG. 20), but when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is two of the BB winning mode and the watermelon winning mode, the BB winning mode and the watermelon Start the BB winning / watermelon winning announcement production in the auxiliary production department to announce that two of the winning modes are set as winning roles Control may be. In addition, when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning mode and the Bell winning mode, it is notified that two of the BB winning mode and the Bell winning mode are set as the winning combination. It may be controlled to start the “BB winning / bell winning notification effect” in the auxiliary effect section. Thus, when the player performs the “BB winning / watermelon winning notification effect” or the “BB winning / bell winning notification effect” in the auxiliary directing unit, the BB winning mode and the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode are simultaneously performed. You can see that it is set as a winning combination. Therefore, for the game in which the notice effect is performed, the player can be directed to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 to establish the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, and the BB winning mode in the subsequent games. The game can be continued by the player with the expectation that is established.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the number of bets is one or two is in the BB winning mode. In this case, the case where the BB winning announcement effect is announced to notify that the BB winning mode is the winning combination is explained. However, as a candidate for the winning combination when the number of bets is one or two, the special gaming state is set. In the case where there are a plurality of types of state transition winning combinations that give the privilege to be transferred, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command has a predetermined state If it is determined that a transitional winning combination is included, an auxiliary effect is provided to notify that the predetermined transitional winning combination is a winning combination. (Top lamp 63, a speaker 64, an auxiliary display unit 65) may be controlled so as to be executed. It should be noted that the predetermined state transition winning combination in which the notice effect is performed may be a part of the plurality of types of state transition winning combinations, or may be all winning combinations.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, when the bet number is one or two, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the watermelon prize. In the case of the mode or the bell winning mode, the case of performing the watermelon winning notification effect or the bell winning notification effect for notifying that the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode is a winning combination has been described. If there are other winning combinations that may be missed depending on the operation timing of the player's stop switches 42 to 44 as candidates for winning combinations when the number is a piece, the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 In the lottery result command process executed by, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is lost. If it is determined that the winning combination is an effective winning combination, the auxiliary production unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) is caused to execute a notification effect for notifying that the winning combination is a winning combination. You may control. If there are multiple winning combinations that may be missed, the announcement effect may be executed only when some of them win the winning combination. On the other hand, when it is a winning combination, an announcement effect may be executed.

  The stop symbol of each winning form in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the stop symbol. However, it is desirable that the symbols that will not be missed be set as the symbols for stopping the Cherry Bell and 7-bell winning.

  The probability of winning each winning form in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the winning probability. Further, the number of medals paid out for the watermelon winning or the bell winning in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the number of medals paid out. However, it is desirable to set the probability of winning a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize higher than other prize-winning modes in one or two. In addition, the winning probability and medal payout number for each winning mode are set so that the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number to the bet number is less than 100% and close to 100% in the case of 1 or 2 It is desirable to do.

  In the first embodiment, the slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel and having five lines as effective lines has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, five reels are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine or a slot machine having three effective lines. The active line may be changed according to the number of bets. For example, when the number of bets is 3, the effective line is set to 5 lines, when the number of bets is 2, the effective line is set to 3 lines, and when the number of bets is 1, the effective line is set. May be set to one line. Further, when the effective line is set to 3 lines, for example, the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3 shown in FIG. 6 may be set, or the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, The upper right line L5 may be set.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the maximum bet number is 3 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the maximum bet number may be set to an arbitrary value of 2 or more. For example, the maximum bet number may be four. In this case, if the game is played with a bet number less than the maximum bet number, the winning probability of each winning mode should be set so that the winning mode in which the maximum bet number (or a multiple thereof) is paid out is won with high probability. That's fine. In addition, when the maximum bet number is 4, if a game is played with one card, for example, winning of each winning mode with one card is won so that a winning mode in which two medals are paid out is won with high probability. If you set a probability and play a game with 2 cards, for example, set the winning probability of each winning mode with 2 cards so that the winning mode with 3 medal payouts won with high probability, When a game is played by multiplying, for example, the winning probability of each winning aspect in three pieces may be set so that a winning aspect in which four medals are paid out is won with high probability. In this way, when the number of bets is small, by setting a small number of medal payout numbers in the winning mode that is won with high probability, the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number to the bet number is less than 100%. Even when the winning probability is set, the winning probability of the winning mode can be increased. It is desirable to set the winning probability and the medal payout number for each winning mode so that the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number to the bet number is less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the second embodiment, as an additional data table, a case has been described in which the drawing contents for adding and displaying a continuous notice effect that is not normally displayed in the variable effect on the third symbol display device 281 are displayed. The additional data table is not limited to this, and the additional data table may be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 310. The drawing content for drawing the effect may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, the drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 310. In addition to prescribing or in addition to prescribing such drawing content, the drawing content necessary to change part or all of the tone of the one production or display in one production The drawing content necessary for changing the displayed image to be displayed may be predetermined.

  When the additional data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing part or all of the color tone in one production, the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the additional data table. Corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), the type of sprite whose color tone is changed at that time, and color information specifying the changed color tone of that sprite. It may be specified. In the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c, the MPU 431 includes, at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, the type of the sprite whose color tone is changed and the color information that specifies the changed color tone of the sprite. If defined, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b is replaced with the color information specified in the additional data table. A drawing list may be created. Thus, the image controller 437 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the additional data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the additional data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 281. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 431 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c. In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, among the various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, a new one is newly added instead of the sprite to be replaced. The sprite type to be displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 437 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described. In addition, an additional transfer data table that is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is provided. You may prepare. This additional transfer data table is used in the corresponding additional data table corresponding to the address specified in the additional data table (or display data table), and the sprite to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

  In this case, when an additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 433 of the display control device 281 and one additional data table is set as the additional data table 433c, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is separate from the transfer data table. The additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, the MPU 431 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the transfer data table for addition set in the transfer data table buffer for addition. You may do it. Thus, the image controller 437 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 436 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by using an additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 436 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional data table. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional data table. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the second embodiment, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the rendering content of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), the effect that is additionally displayed (for example, the continuous notice effect) In the above description, the additional data table that defines the drawing content of the above is set and the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 433e is acquired from each data table. When the display of an effect (for example, a continuous notice effect) that is displayed in addition to (for example, a variable effect) is determined, the display data table corresponding to the effect that becomes the base is added. The drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the displayed effects are added for each address indicating the display time, and a new display data table is created. It generates Le, on the basis of the new display data tables, may be acquired drawing content of the image. Thereby, it is possible to easily display an effect that is displayed in addition to the effect that is the base. In addition, for each type of the base effect, a display data table that defines the rendering contents of only the base effect, and display data that defines the image content that overlaps the effect displayed in addition to the base effect Since it is not necessary to have a table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. In addition, since the drawing contents can be specified using only the newly created display data table, the processing required for the specification is compared with the case where the drawing contents are specified from the display data table and the additional data table. Can be lightened.

  If it is determined that an effect to be displayed in addition to the base effect is to be displayed, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is, and the drawing content of the image is acquired. May be.

  In addition, in the display data table, in addition to the rendering content of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), the rendering content additionally displayed (for example, the continuous notice effect) is additionally displayed. If it is described in a form that clearly shows the rendering content of the production, and the additional production is displayed, it is displayed in addition to the rendering content of the base production. If the rendering content of the effect is specified from the display data table and the effect that is additionally displayed is not displayed, the rendering content that is additionally displayed is discarded, and the effect that becomes the base Only the drawing contents may be specified from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that prescribes the rendering content to be additionally displayed. This eliminates the need for control of the additional data table, thereby reducing the processing load.

  In the second embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, Although the case where only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the player is specified has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A corresponding additional data table may be prepared, and an additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player may be set in the additional data table buffer 433c. Further, the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the second embodiment, the display control device 314 prepares a transfer data table that defines transfer data information of image data corresponding to a sprite used in the display data table in correspondence with the display data table, Although the case where the transfer data table corresponding to the predetermined display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433d as the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when a predetermined display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the transfer data information defined by the corresponding transfer data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. New display data To generate a table, on the basis of the new display data tables, it may be acquired drawing content of the image and the transfer data information at the same time. As a result, the drawing content and transfer data information can be specified using the display data table. The processing load required for identification can be reduced.

  Further, when the transfer data table for addition described above, which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table, is prepared, when a predetermined additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433c, the additional data table is stored in the additional data table. On the other hand, the transfer data information defined by the corresponding additional transfer data table is added for each address indicating the display time, a new additional data table is generated, and an image is generated based on the new additional data table. The drawing content and the transfer data information may be acquired simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In addition, when display of an effect (for example, a continuous notice effect) that is displayed in addition to an effect (for example, a variable effect) is determined, a display data table corresponding to the effect that becomes the base is displayed. On the other hand, the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be additionally displayed are added for each address indicating the display time, and a new display data table is generated. Based on the new display data table In addition, when acquiring the drawing contents of the image, the transfer data information defined by the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is additionally written for each address indicating the display time, with respect to the display data table, The transfer data information specified by the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table is added for each address indicating the display time. Te, it may generate a new display data table. As a result, the display data table can be used to specify the rendering content of the base effect, the rendering content of the effect to be added, and the transfer data information of the image necessary for those renderings. Compared with the case where drawing contents and transfer data information are specified from the table, transfer data table, additional data table, and transfer data table for addition, respectively, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  Further, the transfer data information may be described in advance in the display data table. This also allows the drawing content and transfer data information to be specified using the display data table, so compared to the case where the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively. The processing load required for the identification can be reduced. In addition, in the display data table, in addition to the rendering content of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), the rendering content additionally displayed (for example, the continuous notice effect) is additionally displayed. When the content is described in a format that clearly indicates the rendering content of the effect, the display data table is used not only for the transfer data information used for the base effect but also for the rendering of the effect that is additionally displayed. If the transfer data information of the image is described in a format that clearly indicates that it is the transfer data information of the effect that is additionally displayed, and if the effect that is additionally displayed is displayed, the base and The drawing contents and transfer data information of the effect to be added, and the drawing contents and transfer data information of the effect to be additionally displayed are specified and added from the display data table. If the effect to be displayed is hidden, the rendering content and transfer data information to be additionally displayed are discarded, and only the rendering content and transfer data information of the base effect are displayed from the display data table. You may specify. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering contents and transfer data information of the base effect and the rendering contents and transfer data information of the effect to be added using the display data table. As compared with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display in the display control device 314 has been described. For example, a display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is created. You may make it produce | generate. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the second embodiment, the case has been described in which the common pointer 433e is used in the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, and the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 433e. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

  In the second embodiment, the image controller 437 transmits a V-interrupt signal to the MPU 431 at every image display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) for completing the drawing process. However, the image controller 437 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 431 every time the third symbol display device 281 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 281 is driven so that an image for one frame is always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). Therefore, a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the second embodiment, the image controller 437 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be expanded based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 431 and is expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 281 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, the frame buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 281. Each time the image controller 437 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 281, the image buffer outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 281. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the second embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the main control device is connected via the audio lamp control device 313 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from 310, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b. Although the case has been described, a confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 433b again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is ended until both the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demo command (display demonstration command) are received from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313. Each time it is done, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 433b. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 310, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the background image and to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the second embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control means 314 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435 and After the transfer is completed, the main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 and then the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 314 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 434 to the main image area 435a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 435. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, image data to be resident including image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 431 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 435b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 313 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 435b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 435b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the second embodiment, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered at that time (rendering content), The case of defining image data information (transfer data information) to be transferred at that time has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 281 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 281 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  In addition, in the display data table and the additional data table, image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself as a sprite type to be drawn that is defined every predetermined time interval. The address of the character ROM 434 may be specified. In the display control device 314, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is read from the character ROM 434. Therefore, the character ROM 434 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 434, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the stored image discrimination flag 433h is provided in the work RAM 433 of the display control device 314, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. However, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a may be stored in the work RAM 433. In this case, when the MPU 431 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 431 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a stored in the work RAM 433, and determines the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 436a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 431 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 431 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 433 and also stores the image data of the sprite type. Information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 436a may be deleted.

  In the second embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 437 based on the stored image discrimination flag 433h. In the normal video RAM 436, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 431 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. This process may be performed by the image controller 437. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image determination flag 433h is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 437, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436 is stored for each sprite. You may let them. The work RAM provided in the image controller 437 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the MPU 431 sends the image controller 437 to the image controller 437 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 436. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the second embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” is made resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 among the plurality of back images has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536. Can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the transfer data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 433e, and the MPU 431 indicates the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 437 is controlled so as to transfer the processed image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the necessary sprite type is described, and the MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. It may be your. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 434. The image controller 437 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 436.

  In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”. However, the color tone of the entire image changes with time. May be. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 281 in which the variable effect is performed has been described. The 4th symbol display device is provided separately from 281 and the 4th symbol is displayed on the 4th symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the 3rd symbol display device 281 to execute the continuous notice effect. May be. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 314 or the sound lamp control device 313. In addition, a continuous notice effect may be executed by providing an accessory that operates in accordance with various effects in the pachinko machine 200 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 426 of the pachinko machine 200 under the control of the voice lamp control device 313. The continuous notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 229 to 233 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 281 (and the first symbol display device 237), the symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 426, or the lighting parts 229 to 233 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps playing the game by gazing at the third symbol display device 281 where the variation effect is performed, but the symbol display by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 281 is performed. Because the action of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 426, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting parts 229 to 233, the continuous notice effect is performed, and an effect different from normal is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 426, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 229 to 233. A notice effect can be performed.

  In addition, if the continuous notice effect is performed by sound output from the sound output device 426 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 229 to 233, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 313. The main control device 310 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 313 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 314 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 281, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 426. A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 229 to 233 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. In addition, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 281, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 426, lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 229 to 233 Or a combination thereof), even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, time shortage hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect are prepared. Good.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the image for the continuous notice effect different from the change effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the continuous notice effect is performed has been described. The present invention is not limited, and the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” that is a combination of predetermined symbols as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is finished. In this case, in the continuous notice command processing (see FIG. 53) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 421 of the display control device 313, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and other stop symbol determination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process. Occasionally, chances can be confirmed. If the chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 281, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the second embodiment, the main control device 310 obtains various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) acquired at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is not necessarily limited to this. Various counters (first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter) acquired at the time of winning a start by another command are described. The information of the C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 313.

  In the second embodiment, the main controller 310 uses information on various counters (first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) acquired at the time of starting winning in the reserved ball number command. In addition, the reserved lamp number command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 313, and the reserved lamp number command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 313 according to the values of various counters included in the reserved ball number command. Estimate the result of the lottery performed in response to the held ball held at that time and the stop type after the fluctuating production, and based on the estimation result and the number of held balls held at that time, continuous notice production Although the case where it is determined whether or not to perform is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main controller 310 estimates the lottery result corresponding to the start winning and the stop type after the fluctuating effect from the values of various counters acquired at the start winning, and at least a part of the estimated result is the number of reserved balls. The voice lamp control device 313 may be notified by including it in the command, and the voice lamp control device 313 may determine whether to perform the continuous notice effect based on the notified estimation result. Further, whether or not main controller 310 may perform the continuous notice effect based on the lottery result corresponding to the start prize and the stop type after the fluctuating effect estimated from the values of various counters acquired at the start prize. And at least the determination result is included in the number-of-holding-balls command and is notified to the audio lamp control device 313, and the audio lamp control device 313 finally determines whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect based on the determination result. May be determined. Further, it is determined whether or not the main control device 310 performs the continuous notice effect, and the determination result is included in the reserved ball number command to notify the sound lamp control device 313, and the sound lamp control device 313 performs the continuous notice effect. Only the production mode may be determined. As information to be included in the reserved ball number command, information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start prize, information on the stop type after the fluctuating effect, information on whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or the continuous notice effect is performed. By using this information, the command size of the reserved ball number command can be reduced as compared with the case where the values of various counters are included. In addition, information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start winning, information on the stop type after the fluctuating effect, information on whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or information on whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed, The command may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 by a command different from the reserved ball number command.

  In the second embodiment, when the continuous warning command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314, the display control device 314 corresponds to the continuous warning image type indicated by the continuous warning command. The case where the transfer instruction is performed so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 has been described. In some cases, after image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command is once transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, it is overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect ends. It may be controlled not to be performed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

  In addition, when the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command but also its step A transfer instruction may be made so that the image data corresponding to all the continuous notice image types used in the up-type continuous notice effect is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous preview image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 436 is controlled not to be overwritten by other image data until the end of the continuous preview effect. Also good. Thus, the image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 436 before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect. Further, it is possible to suppress the same image data from being transferred repeatedly.

  In the sound lamp control device 313, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (S2009) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 46), and the continuous notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 314 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 314. Then, the display control device 314 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in response to reception of this command. Also good. Thereby, before the fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 can be started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 436.

  In addition, the display control device 314 may store the image data used in the continuous notice effect in a sub area dedicated to the continuous notice effect image provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. This prevents the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 436. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  Further, the continuous notice command transmitted from the display control device 314 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect in which the changing effect is set. As a result, since the display control device 314 can recognize that the display of the continuous notice effect is the last, it is stored in the normal video RAM 436 used for the continuous notice effect while the continuous notice effect is being performed. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  In the second embodiment, the case has been described where the continuous notice command is used to notify the display control device 314 of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type from the sound lamp control device 313. The change pattern command may be included. That is, in the variation display process (see FIG. 47) executed by the audio lamp control device 313, when a variation pattern command for display is generated (S2104), it is determined whether or not a continuous notice effect is to be performed. When a notice effect is performed, information regarding the implementation and the continuous notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 314, if the received display variation pattern command includes information regarding the execution of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type, the display control device 314 reads from the character ROM 434 of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type. A transfer instruction to the normal video RAM 436 may be issued, and an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be set in the additional data table buffer 433c. Thereby, since the number of commands is reduced, the processing can be simplified.

  In addition, when including information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image in the display variation pattern command, it corresponds to the display data table that does not support the continuous notice image for each variation pattern, and for each successive notice image type. The display control device 314 sets the corresponding display data table in the display data table buffer 433b according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous notice image type. May be. That is, the display data table may include a drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and a drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Accordingly, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the image data transfer instruction corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in accordance with reception of the display variation pattern command. Thereby, since it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

  In the second embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is an audio lamp based on the stop symbols determined by the main control device 310 (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach, complete-reach reach). Although the case where it is set by the control device 313 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 313, the last variation effect that has been suspended is stopped. If the symbol is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set in place of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 310 instead of the stop symbol in the front / rear reach manner. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 310, and is always a back-and-forth reach, so that the player has high expectation. be able to.

  In the second embodiment, when performing a continuous notice effect together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, each variation effect is performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each variation. When the continuous notice effect is performed together with all the suspended variation effects, the variation effect other than the last variation effect that has been suspended may be changed to a variation effect. In this case, the process of generating the display variation pattern command (see S2104 in FIG. 47) in the audio lamp control device 313 changes the variation pattern in accordance with the setting state of the continuous notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. It may be. If the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect aspect of the change effect is not updated, and the effect aspect of the change effect is displayed as it is based on the change pattern determined by the main control device 310. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the corresponding variation effect is, for example, the super reach variation effect and the jackpot does not appear as a result, the player's expectation However, the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect to be executed last is continuously performed as the off-change effect. The player can have a higher expectation for the fluctuating performance.

  In the said 2nd Embodiment, when execution of the continuous notice effect was determined, although the case where a continuous notice effect was always performed to the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, For example, In the situation where execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 281 when the frame button 222 is pressed by the player.

  In the second embodiment described above, in the case of executing the fluctuation effect, the case where the high-speed fluctuation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. Instead, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed so as to be unrecognizable, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed. .

  In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which one game entrance 264 is provided in the game board 213, where a lottery win is started when a ball enters the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the game board 213 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the lottery lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first entrance, the number of held balls command that the main control device 310 transmits to the sound lamp control device 313 indicates which hold is held by the first entrance. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 313, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 313 determines to start the continuous notice effect when receiving the number-of-holding balls command, all the first entrances at that time are determined. The continuous notice effect may be executed over the fluctuating effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. Further, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and that preferentially executes a variation effect held at one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when entering the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, the continuous notice effect is provided for the change effect held at the first entry with a low priority. Is started, and when the fluctuating effect is continuously put on hold at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect does not end easily.

  In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is decreased by 1 (see S2105 in FIG. 47). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 401 of the main controller 310, the number of reserved balls of the main controller 310 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S1207). The reserved ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 403a is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 (see S1205 in FIG. 37). It may be transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sound lamp controller 313 together with the transmission of the command. In this case, S2105 in FIG. 47 is omitted. When transmitting the subtracted value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310, the reserved ball number command includes information indicating that the number of held balls after the subtraction (that is, the start winning prize). Including the information indicating that the number is not the number of reserved balls added in association with the starting prize), and the value of various counters acquired with the start winning prize may not be included. Since the determination as to whether or not the continuous notice effect is permitted is made when there is a start winning prize, the voice lamp control device 313 determines whether the number of reserved balls command is in the command determination process (see FIG. 46). When reception is detected, if the number of held balls indicated by the number of held balls is the number of held balls after subtraction, that is, if it is not the number of held balls added with the start winning prize, the continuous notice determination processing May be skipped.

  In the second embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 313 receives the reserved ball number command and determines the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is displayed for all the variable effects that are held at that time. Although the case where it performs is demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, When the start of a continuous notice effect is determined, even if it determines whether to perform a continuous notice effect in each individual variable effect Good. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, a counter is provided that is updated every time the variation display process (see FIG. 47) is executed by the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 and determines whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in each variation effect. May be. In the variation display process, when performing the continuous notice effect (S2107: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. A continuous notice command may be set (S2108). In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the held ball number counter 423a when determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effect, the variation pattern of the variable effect for which determination is performed, and a series The game state (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time shortage hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect, or a combination of two or more of these. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In the second embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313, and the sound lamp control device 313 instructs the display control device 314 to display. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a continuous notice is used instead of a command generated by the sound lamp control apparatus 313 and notified to the display control device 314, such as a continuous notice command or an error occurrence command. Various flags such as a flag and an error occurrence flag are generated, and based on the flags, a display data table or an additional data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b or the additional data table buffer 433c, or various image data such as a warning image is set. It may be generated or a necessary image data transfer instruction may be set.

  In the second embodiment, the first entrance 264 and the second entrance 267 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on winning at the first entrance 264 is expressed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 281 or the area divided into four is equal to the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 237, and the number of held balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the second embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281. Alternatively, the symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The invention described in the second embodiment may be implemented in the first embodiment. That is, in the slot machine 10, a display data table and an additional data table are prepared in advance for each of various effects displayed on the auxiliary display device 65 in response to a command received from the main control device 101. Select the display data table or additional data table to be used according to the contents of the received command, and expand the drawing contents described in the selected data table in the order of addresses according to the pointer update. The image displayed on the auxiliary display device 65 may be drawn by instructing the image controller 188 to draw an image according to the drawn content. In addition, the corresponding transfer data table is set in accordance with the display data table setting, the transfer data information described in the transfer data table is expanded in the order of addresses according to the pointer update, and the expanded transfer data is expanded. The image data may be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 according to the information.

  Here, in game machines other than gaming machines (pachinko machines and slot machines), the display content must be changed from moment to moment based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted. The display data table corresponding to each effect as described above cannot be provided. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, the display control device 81 performs a lottery performed based on the gaming state of the slot machine 10 determined by various commands received from the main control device 101 and a start command by operating the start lever 41. Since an effect mode is selected based on the result of (award / failure determination of a winning mode) and the auxiliary effect section executes various effects, an effect to be displayed by preparing a display data table corresponding to each effect It is possible to easily set a display data table buffer according to the above and create a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table. And by comprising in this way, like the conventional slot machine, every time the effect image displayed on the auxiliary | assistant display part 65 is changed, it comprises so that the program run by MPU181 may be started, and an effect image Compared to the case where a large load is required for the process of starting and executing a program that is complicated and enormous due to the diversification of various types, the auxiliary display unit is merely a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table to be used. Since the effect image to be displayed on 65 can be changed, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 81, various types of effect images can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  The present invention may be implemented in a slot machine of a type different from the so-called A type slot machine described in the first embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as B type, C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, or even a type equipped with a CT game. In any case, it is obvious that the same effects as those of the first embodiment described above can be obtained. In addition, examples of bonus winning in each type include BB winning, RB winning, SB winning, CT winning and the like.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the second embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

  A main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub-control means. In the slot machine, the sub-control unit is configured to draw an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display unit and a command received from the main control unit from a plurality of display modes. A first display determining means for determining a display type to be displayed and a plurality of display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type is defined for each screen. First regulation information storage means for storing first regulation information, and the first regulation information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means are selected from the first regulation information storage means. The first selection means, the first pointer means updated with the passage of time, and each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means, Based on the drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means and the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, the image drawing means And drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing drawing of an image for one screen. The image drawing means is based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. 1. A slot machine 1 for drawing an image for one screen.

  According to the slot machine 1, in the sub-control means, the first specified information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display types is 1 First definition information defined for each screen is stored, and a first display type corresponding to a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means determined from the plurality of display modes by the first display determination means. The regulation information is selected from the first regulation information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the first pointer means is updated every time, and each time the update is performed, 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means. Drawing information for one screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen is drawn based on the specified drawing information for one screen. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the drawing image means. Thereby, when the display type to be displayed in response to the command received from the main control means is changed, the display can be easily performed only by selecting the first specified information corresponding to the display type from the first specified information storage means. An image corresponding to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  A main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub-control means. The sub-control means is an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes. A first display determining means for determining a display type to be displayed and a plurality of display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type is defined for each screen. A first selection information storage unit that stores first definition information; and a first selection that selects, from the first definition information storage unit, the first definition information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination unit. Each time the first pointer means is updated on the basis of the first specified information selected by the first selection means. Based on the drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the first pointer means, and the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, 1 for the image drawing means. Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing drawing of an image for a screen, and the image drawing means is configured to display one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. A gaming machine A1 that draws an image of minutes.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the sub-control means, the first specified information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display types is 1 First definition information defined for each screen is stored, and a first display type corresponding to a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means determined from the plurality of display modes by the first display determination means. The regulation information is selected from the first regulation information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the first pointer means is updated every time, and each time the update is performed, 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means. Drawing information for one screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen is drawn based on the specified drawing information for one screen. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the drawing image means. Thereby, when the display type to be displayed in response to the command received from the main control means is changed, the display can be easily performed only by selecting the first specified information corresponding to the display type from the first specified information storage means. An image corresponding to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub-control means includes first image information storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means, and is defined for each screen in the first definition information. The drawing information includes specifying information for specifying image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen, and the drawing instruction information generating means is for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. Based on the drawing information, generating drawing instruction information including image instruction information for instructing image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen from the specific information included in the drawing information, Based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit, the drawing instruction information is included in the plurality of image information stored in the first image information storage unit. Serial using image information instructed by the image instruction information, the gaming machine is characterized in that to draw the image for one screen A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in the sub-control means, the first image information storage means stores a plurality of pieces of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means. In addition, the drawing information specified for each screen in the first specification information includes specifying information for specifying image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen, and is drawn by the drawing information specifying means. Based on the specified drawing information for one screen, drawing instruction information including image instruction information for instructing image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen is drawn based on the specific information included in the drawing information. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the generated drawing instruction information, the image information instructed by the image drawing means by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information among the plurality of pieces of image information stored in the first image information storage means. An image for one screen is drawn using. As a result, in the first specified information, it is possible to cope with various image types only by specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for one screen by the specifying information included in the drawing information specified for each screen. The drawn image can be drawn and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to more easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A2, the sub-control unit can perform a reading operation at a higher speed than the first image storage unit, stores the image information stored in the first image storage unit, and stores the image information stored therein. The image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least image information stored in the second image storage means, The sub-control unit further uses the first image information according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information when drawing the image by the image drawing unit before the first image information is used. A gaming machine A3, comprising first transfer control means for controlling transfer of the image information from the image storage means to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the sub-control means can perform a reading operation faster than the first image storage means, and stores the image information stored in the first image storage means and the stored image. Second image storage means capable of rewriting information is provided, and the image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second image storage means. It is configured. When one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing unit according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first piece of information is controlled by the first transfer control unit before the image information is used. Is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, even if a memory having a low readout speed is used as the first image storage means, the image drawing means uses at least predetermined image information transferred to the second storage means capable of a high-speed readout operation. Since the image to be displayed on the display means is drawn, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time when the image is desired to be displayed. Therefore, even if a memory having a slow reading speed is used as the first image storage unit, various effects can be immediately displayed on the image display unit.

  In the gaming machine A3, the first transfer control means converts the image information before the image information is used for drawing the image by the image drawing means according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. Transfer instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to transfer from the first image storage means to the second image storage means, and the sub-control means is generated by the drawing instruction information generation means Instruction information generating means for generating instruction information including drawing instruction information and the transfer instruction information generated by the first transfer control means is provided, and the image drawing means includes the image information generated by the drawing information generation means. An image for one screen is drawn based on the drawing instruction information included in the instruction information, and the first image is displayed based on the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. Gaming machine A4, characterized in that the 憶 means is to transfer the first image information to the second image storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in the sub-control means, the first transfer control means determines that one image information is used before the image drawing information is drawn by the image drawing means according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. Transfer instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to transfer information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means is generated. The drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generation means and the first transfer control means Instruction information including the generated transfer instruction information is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information included in the instruction information generated by the drawing information generating means, and the image drawing means performs a first operation based on the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. The image information is transferred from one image storage means to the second image storage means. Thus, based on the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, before the image information is used for image drawing by the image drawing means, the image drawing means instructs the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. Since the image information can be transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means, even if a memory having a low readout speed is used as the first image storage means, the image drawing means can The image displayed on the image display means can be reliably drawn using at least the predetermined image information transferred to the second storage means capable of reading.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first regulation information storage means stores the first regulation information for each element obtained by subdividing the display mode of each display type, and the sub-control means Element specifying means for specifying an element constituting the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determining means is provided, and the first selecting means corresponds to the display type determined by the first display determining means A gaming machine A5, wherein all the first specification information corresponding to the element specified by the element specification means is selected from the first specification information storage means as the first specification information.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the first specified information storage means stores first specified information for each element obtained by subdividing the display mode of each display type. Here, the display mode of each display type generally includes many elements that have the same image displayed in each of them, and drawing information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the common element is displayed. In this case, the first definition information is not included in the first definition information corresponding to each display type, but only included in the first definition information corresponding to the element. It can be memorized. On the other hand, even if the first specified information is stored for each element, the sub-control means specifies the elements constituting the display type of the display type determined by the first display determination means by the element specification means, and the first selection means Thus, as the first definition information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means, all the first definition information corresponding to the element specified by the element specifying means is selected from the first definition information storage means. . As a result, an element constituting the display mode of the display type determined with respect to the command received from the main control means is specified, and only the first prescribed information corresponding to the element is selected from the first prescribed information storage means. An image corresponding to the display type can be easily drawn and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means while efficiently storing the first specified information.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the gaming machine Is to give a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect, and the first prescribed information storage means includes the first prescribed information Is stored for each of the plurality of dynamic display effects.

  According to the gaming machine A6, a dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in an effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the identification information predetermined by the dynamic display effect appears. When this is done, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and according to the effect mode by variously changing the effect mode of this dynamic display effect A player can have a sense of expectation. Here, since the first regulation information is stored in the first regulation information storage unit for each of the plurality of dynamic display effects, the first display determination unit performs one rendering mode on the image display unit based on the command. When it is determined that the dynamic display effect is to be displayed, the first specifying information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of the one effect mode is selected by the first selecting means from the first specifying information storage means. Thus, in the dynamic display effect that gives the player various expectations, the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of one effect mode set based on the command is selected from the first specified information storage means. It is possible to easily draw an image corresponding to the effect mode and display it on the image display means. Therefore, since a wide variety of dynamic display effects displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved, the player can be further enhanced by the dynamic display effects.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub control unit determines a second display type to be displayed in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination unit from among a plurality of display modes. A second display determining means that is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second definition information storage means for storing definition information, and second selection information for selecting the second definition information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means from the second definition information storage means And a second pointer means that is updated together with the update of the first pointer means, and the drawing information specifying means is selected by the first selection means every time the first pointer means is updated. Before Based on the first prescribed information, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and updated based on the second prescribed information selected by the second selecting means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by specifying drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed on the one screen in correspondence with the second pointer means, thereby specifying drawing information necessary for the entire image.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in the sub-control means, the second display type to be displayed in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination means is selected from the plurality of display modes. Determined by. Further, the second specified information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of second display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is specified for each screen. Second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specified information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the second pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means. Then, each time the first pointer unit is updated, the drawing information specifying unit is based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting unit, and corresponds to the updated first pointer unit. By specifying drawing information and specifying drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed on one screen in accordance with the updated second pointer means based on the second specified information selected by the second selection means The drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified. Thereby, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means and displayed, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second specified information storage means. The image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed only by selecting from the above. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine B1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects in which identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command. When the predetermined identification information appears by the display effect, the player gives a predetermined game value, and the sub-control means displays the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. The second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effects for each of the dynamic display effects for the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means. The game machine B2 is characterized in that it determines to display an image of the second display type.

  According to the gaming machine B2, a dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in an effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the identification information predetermined by the dynamic display effect appears. When this is done, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and according to the effect mode by variously changing the effect mode of this dynamic display effect A player can have a sense of expectation. In the sub-control means, the number of standby times of the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the standby number storage means, and the standby stored in the standby number storage means is based on a command from the main controller. In each of the dynamic display effects corresponding to the number of times, it is determined by the second display determination means to display an image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. Thereby, the image of the second display type can be added and displayed continuously over a plurality of dynamic display effects. Thereby, various expectations can be given to the player who has visually recognized that images of the second display type are continuously displayed. And even if the image of the second display type is continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type is set to the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine B1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed simply by selecting from the regulation information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the second display determining means determines whether or not to display an image of the second display type on the image display means, and the second selecting means is the second display When it is determined by the determining means that the image of the second display type is not displayed, it should be added to the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determining means instead of the second specified information. A gaming machine B3, wherein information indicating that there is no drawing information is selected.

  According to the gaming machine B3, when the second display determining unit determines to hide the image of the second display type, the display type determined by the first display determining unit instead of the second specified information. Information indicating that there is no drawing information to be added to the display mode is selected by the second selection means. Thus, every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, it corresponds to the updated first pointer means specified based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. Drawing information related to the second display type is not added to drawing information for one screen, and drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified. Therefore, even when an image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display / non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the first pointer means also serves as the second pointer means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, since the first pointer unit also serves as the second pointer unit, the drawing information specifying unit is selected by the first selection unit every time the first pointer unit is updated. The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the information, and the first pointer means is supported based on the second specified information selected by the second selection means. Thus, by specifying the drawing information to be additionally displayed on one screen, the drawing information necessary for the entire image can be specified, and the entire image to be displayed easily from each specified information with only one pointer means It is possible to specify the drawing information necessary for

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub control unit determines a second display type to be displayed in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination unit from among a plurality of display modes. A second display determining means that is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second definition information storage means for storing definition information, and second selection information for selecting the second definition information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means from the second definition information storage means And the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed specified by the second specification information selected by the second selection unit for each screen with respect to the first specification information selected by the first selection unit. In addition to First definition information generating means for generating new definition information, and the drawing information specifying means generates a new definition generated by the first definition information generating means each time the first pointer means is updated. A gaming machine C1 that specifies drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the information.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in the sub control means, the second display type to be displayed in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination means is selected from the plurality of display modes. Determined by. Further, the second specified information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of second display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is specified for each screen. Second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specified information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed specified by the second specification information selected by the second selection unit with respect to the first specification information selected by the first selection unit by the first specification information generation unit. Is added for each screen, new regulation information is generated. Then, every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the new specified information generated by the first specified information generating means. Minute drawing information is specified. Thereby, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means and displayed, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second specified information storage means. The image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine C1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects that cause the image display means to dynamically display identification information in an effect mode set based on the command. When the predetermined identification information appears by the display effect, the player gives a predetermined game value, and the sub-control means displays the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. The second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effects for each of the dynamic display effects for the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means. The game machine C2 is characterized in that it determines to display an image of the second display type.

  According to the gaming machine C2, a dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in an effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the identification information predetermined by the dynamic display effect appears. When this is done, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and according to the effect mode by variously changing the effect mode of this dynamic display effect A player can have a sense of expectation. In the sub-control means, the number of standby times of the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the standby number storage means, and the standby stored in the standby number storage means is based on a command from the main controller. In each of the dynamic display effects corresponding to the number of times, it is determined by the second display determination means to display an image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. Thereby, the image of the second display type can be added and displayed continuously over a plurality of dynamic display effects. Thereby, various expectations can be given to the player who has visually recognized that images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Even if the image of the second display type is continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine C1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed simply by selecting from the regulation information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second display determining means determines whether or not to display an image of the second display type on the image display means, and the drawing information specifying means is the second display When it is determined by the determining means that the image of the second display type is not displayed, the updated first pointer means is supported based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. A game machine C3 that specifies drawing information for one screen to be played.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when it is determined by the second display determining means that the second display type image is not displayed, the drawing information specifying means includes the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display / non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub-control unit adds a second display type to be displayed in addition to the display type of the display type determined by the first display determination unit from among a plurality of display modes. Second display determining means for determining, and the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means includes the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the second display type displayed in addition to the above is defined for each screen, and the drawing information specifying means is updated each time the first pointer means is updated. Based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified and determined by the second display determination means. Second display type By specifying the drawing information of the corresponding image to be added displayed on the one screen, the gaming machine D1, characterized in that identifying the drawing information needed for the entire image.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in the sub-control means, the second display that is displayed in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display forms. The type is determined by the second display determining means. In addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the display type by the first specifying information stored in the first specifying information storage unit The drawing information necessary for drawing the type of image is defined for each screen, and every time the first pointer unit is updated by the drawing information specifying unit, the first specifying information selected by the first selection unit is added. Based on this, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and an image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means Drawing information is specified, and drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified. Thereby, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means and displayed, the drawing of the second display type to be additionally displayed from the selected first specified information. If the information is specified, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine D1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects that cause the image display means to dynamically display the identification information in an effect mode set based on the command. When the predetermined identification information appears by the display effect, the player gives a predetermined game value, and the sub-control means displays the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. The second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effects for each of the dynamic display effects for the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means. The game machine D2 is characterized in that it determines to display an image of the second display type.

  According to the gaming machine D2, a dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in an effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the identification information predetermined by the dynamic display effect appears. When this is done, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a predetermined game value is given, and according to the effect mode by variously changing the effect mode of this dynamic display effect A player can have a sense of expectation. In the sub-control means, the number of standby times of the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the standby number storage means, and the standby stored in the standby number storage means is based on a command from the main controller. In each of the dynamic display effects corresponding to the number of times, it is determined by the second display determination means to display an image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. Thereby, the image of the second display type can be added and displayed continuously over a plurality of dynamic display effects. Thereby, various expectations can be given to the player who has visually recognized that images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Even if the image of the second display type is continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine D1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed simply by selecting from the regulation information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second display determining means determines whether or not to display an image of the second display type on the image display means, and the drawing information specifying means is the second display When it is determined by the determining means that the image of the second display type is not displayed, it corresponds to the updated first pointer means based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. The game machine D3 is characterized in that the drawing information for one screen to be specified is specified and the drawing information of the image of the second display type specified in the first specified information is discarded.

  According to the gaming machine D3, when it is determined by the second display determining means that the image of the second display type is not displayed, the drawing information specifying means uses the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the drawing information of the image of the second display type specified in the first specification information is discarded. Yes. Therefore, even when an image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display / non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the sub control means can perform a reading operation at a higher speed than the first image storage means, and third image storage means for storing the image information stored in the first image storage means. The image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the third image storage means and the image information stored in the second image storage means The auxiliary control means further controls to transfer a part of the image information stored in the first image storage means to the third image storage means at the time of startup by turning on the power. 2 transfer control means, and the third image storage means retains image information transferred under the control of the second transfer control means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached, and the first transfer control means. In the case where image information not held in the third image storage means is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, before the image information is used, A gaming machine E1 that controls transfer of image information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the sub-control means can perform a reading operation at a higher speed than the first image storage means, and the third image storage means for storing the image information stored in the first image storage means. The image drawing means is provided and draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the third image storage means and the image information stored in the second image storage means. It is configured as follows. Here, a part of the image information stored in the first image storage means is transferred to the third image storage means by the control of the second transfer control means at the time of start-up by turning on the power, and the third image storage means The image information transferred under the control of the second transfer control means is held at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. On the other hand, when image information not held in the third image storage means is used for image control by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first transfer control means is used before the image information is used. By this control, the image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  As a result, even if a memory having a slow reading speed of the first storage means is used, the image drawing means transfers the image information held in the third image storage means capable of a high-speed reading operation and the second image storage means. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is drawn using the image information, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. In addition, since the image information held in the third image storage means is held at least until a predetermined trigger ends, the image information transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means is reduced. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the transfer of the image information from the first image storage unit to the second image storage unit.

  In the gaming machine E1, the image information to be held in the third image storage means is image information for displaying an image frequently displayed by the image display means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the image information for displaying the image frequently displayed by the image display means is held in the third image storage means. Therefore, every time the image is displayed on the image display means, Since it is not necessary to read out the image information from the one-image storage means, the frequently displayed image can be surely displayed at a desired time.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the image information held in the third image storage means is controlled by the sub-control means based on a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub-control means. The gaming machine E4 is image information for displaying an image to be displayed immediately on the image display means.

  The signal input to the sub-control means may be input signals from various sensors such as a vibration sensor provided in the gaming machine and a gaming medium detection sensor that detects gaming media loaded in the gaming machine. It may be an input signal from a button operated by the player. Further, the image to be displayed immediately on the image display unit may be, for example, an image for notifying an error or a back image displayed on the image display unit.

  According to the gaming machine E3, based on a command transmitted from the main control unit or a signal input to the sub control unit, an image for displaying an image to be displayed immediately on the image display unit under the control of the sub control unit Since the information is held in the third image storage means, an image for displaying an image to be displayed immediately after a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub control means is input. The image control means can control the image using the image information held in the third image storage means without reading the information from the first image storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display an image to be displayed immediately at a desired time.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4 and E1 to E3, the first image storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the first image storage means is configured by a NAND flash memory. Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area and is inexpensive, and therefore the capacity of the first image storage unit is increased while suppressing an increase in cost. be able to. Therefore, since a large amount of image information for displaying an image on the image display means can be stored in the first image storage means, the image to be displayed on the image display means can be diversified. Can be improved. On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that the reading speed is slower than that of other memories, but with the configuration described in any of the gaming machines A3, A4 and E1 to E3, the image drawing means Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is drawn using the image information transferred to the second image storage means capable of at least a high-speed read operation, even if the first image storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory, A predetermined image can be displayed without a problem at a desired time. Therefore, it is possible to display a predetermined image without any problem at a desired time while diversifying the images displayed on the image display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4 and E1 to E4, the sub-control unit corresponds to the first regulation information, and among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information, Third prescription information storage means storing third prescription information prescribing image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and third prescription information corresponding to the first prescription information selected by the first selection means The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third selection means selected from the third definition information storage means and the third definition information selected by the third selection means. Transfer information specifying means, wherein the first transfer control means determines the image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means according to the image instruction information including the image information included in the drawing instruction information. Before use in rendering of an image by the image drawing means, said game machine F1, characterized in that control to transfer to the from the first image storage means the second image storing means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in the sub-control means, the image to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in correspondence with the first definition information. Third regulation information that defines the information is stored in the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third selection information corresponding to the first specification information selected by the first selection means is selected from the third specification information storage means by the third selection means, and based on the selected third specification information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, before the first transfer control means uses the specified image information to be transferred to draw the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first image storage means Transferred to the two-image storage means. Thereby, for the selected first prescribed information, image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first prescribed information can be easily specified. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first specified information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine E1, the sub-control unit is associated with the first definition information and is not held in the third image storage unit among image information necessary for drawing an image defined by the first definition information. Corresponding to the third specified information storage means storing the third specified information specifying the image information as the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the first specified information selected by the first selecting means Based on the third selection information selected by the third selection means and the third selection information selected by the third selection information storage means, and transferred to the second image storage means Transfer information specifying means for specifying image information, wherein the first transfer control means includes image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means, and the image information is included in the drawing instruction information. Instructions Gaming machine F2, wherein the prior to use in rendering of an image by the image drawing means, be controlled to be transferred from the first image storing unit to the second image storage means in accordance with distribution.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in the sub-control means, image information that is not held in the third image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first definition information in correspondence with the first definition information. Third provision information defining information as image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third provision information storage means. Here, the third selection information corresponding to the first specification information selected by the first selection means is selected from the third specification information storage means by the third selection means, and based on the selected third specification information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, before the first transfer control means uses the specified image information to be transferred to draw the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first image storage means Transferred to the two-image storage means. As a result, the second image storage is performed because the selected first definition information is not held in the third image storage unit among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information. Since the image information to be transferred to the means can be easily specified, the image displayed based on the first specified information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sub-control means includes third pointer means that is updated together with the update of the first pointer means, and the transfer information specifying means corresponds to the updated third pointer means. Then, the gaming machine F3, wherein the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third specified information selected by the third selection means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the third pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means, and the transfer information specifying means selects the third pointer means corresponding to the updated third pointer means. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third specified information. Thereby, the predetermined image information can be transferred from the first image storage area to the second image storage area in accordance with the update of the first pointer means, and the transfer timing can be easily set.

  In the gaming machine F3, the third specifying information specifies image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit for each unit time when an image for one screen is displayed on the image display unit. Characteristic gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, since the third defining information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means every unit time, the transfer information specifying means is used to update the third pointer means. In addition, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area to be transferred can be easily specified.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the third specified information storage means includes image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among image information necessary for drawing an image specified by the first specified information. If not, the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information is not stored, and the transfer information specifying means has the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information selected by the first regulation means. In the case where the third selection means determines that the information is not stored in the third prescribed information storage means, it is specified that there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage area. A gaming machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, when there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information, the first regulation information corresponds to the first regulation information. The third regulation information is not stored in the third regulation information storage means. When the third selecting means determines that the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first specifying means is not stored in the third specifying information storage means, the transferred image specifying means Then, it is specified that there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage area. This makes it easy to determine whether there is image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information, based on the presence or absence of the third definition information. Therefore, processing can be reduced. Moreover, since it can suppress storing unnecessary 3rd prescription | regulation information in a 3rd prescription | regulation information storage means, the increase in the memory capacity of a memory | storage means can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control unit displays the second display in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination unit from among a plurality of display modes. Second display determining means for determining a display type and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed for each of the plurality of second display types for each screen. The second regulation information storage means for storing the prescribed second regulation information, and the second regulation information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display decision means is selected from the second regulation information storage means. Second selection means that updates the second pointer means that is updated together with the update of the first pointer means, and the drawing information specifying means is updated each time the first pointer means is updated. By selection means Based on the selected first specified information, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and based on the second specified information selected by the second selecting means. The drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means is specified, whereby the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified. Corresponding to the second stipulation information, among the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed stipulated by the second stipulation information, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stipulated. 4th prescription information storage means in which 4 prescription information was memorized, and 4th selection means which chooses the 4th prescription information corresponding to the 2nd prescription information selected by the 2nd selection means from the 4th prescription information storage means And the fourth Transfer information specifying means for specifying image information to be transferred to the second image storage means on the basis of the fourth specified information selected by the determining means, and the first transfer control means has the transfer information specifying The image information to be transferred specified by the means is transferred from the first image storage means before the image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. A gaming machine F6 that is controlled to be transferred to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in the sub-control means, the second display type to be displayed in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination means is selected from the plurality of display modes. Determined by. Further, the second specified information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of second display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is specified for each screen. Second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specified information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the second pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means. Then, each time the first pointer unit is updated, the drawing information specifying unit is based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting unit, and corresponds to the updated first pointer unit. By specifying drawing information and specifying drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed on one screen in accordance with the updated second pointer means based on the second specified information selected by the second selection means The drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified. Thereby, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means and displayed, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second specified information storage means. The image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed only by selecting from the above. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  Further, in the sub-control means, image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among image information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed defined by the second definition information in association with the second definition information. Is stored in the fourth specification information storage means. Here, the fourth specification information corresponding to the second specification information selected by the second selection means is selected from the fourth specification information storage means by the fourth selection means, and based on the selected fourth specification information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, before the first transfer control means uses the specified image information to be transferred to draw the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first image storage means Transferred to the two-image storage means. As a result, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed, which is defined by the second definition information, can be easily obtained for the selected second definition information. Therefore, it is possible to reliably draw an image to be additionally displayed based on the second specified information and display it on the image display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4 and E1 to E4, the sub-control unit corresponds to the first regulation information, and among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information, Third prescription information storage means storing third prescription information prescribing image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and third prescription information corresponding to the first prescription information selected by the first selection means Is defined by the third selection information selected by the third selection means and the third selection means selected by the third selection information storage means and the first definition information selected by the first selection means. Image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and second definition information generation means for generating new definition information, wherein the drawing information identification means is updated on the first pointer means. Every time, the 2 Based on the new regulation information generated by the regulation information generation means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the image to be transferred to the second image storage area The information is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. A gaming machine G1 to play.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in the sub-control means, the image to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in correspondence with the first definition information. Third regulation information that defines the information is stored in the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third selecting information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means, and is specified by the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is added to the first regulation information selected by the first selection means by the second regulation information generation means, and new regulation information is generated. Each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. Is done. As a result, the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information can be easily specified for the selected first specified information, and necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information. Since the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily specified among the correct image information, the image displayed based on the first specified information is reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means. Can be made.

  In the gaming machine E1, the sub-control unit is associated with the first definition information and is not held in the third image storage unit among image information necessary for drawing an image defined by the first definition information. Corresponding to the third specified information storage means storing the third specified information specifying the image information as the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the first specified information selected by the first selecting means Third selection information for selecting the third definition information to be selected from the third specification information storage means, and the third specification selected by the third selection means to the first specification information selected by the first selection means. Image information to be transferred to the second image storage means defined by the information, and second definition information generation means for generating new definition information, and the drawing information specifying means includes the first pointer Means updated Each time, based on the new regulation information generated by the second regulation information generation means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the second image storage The image information to be transferred to the area is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by transferring.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in the sub-control means, the image information that is not held in the third image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first definition information in association with the first definition information. Third provision information defining information as image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third provision information storage means. Here, the third selecting information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means, and is specified by the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is added to the first regulation information selected by the first selection means by the second regulation information generation means, and new regulation information is generated. Each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. Is done. As a result, the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information can be easily specified for the selected first specified information, and necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information. Since the image information that is not held in the third image storage means among the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily specified, the image information is displayed based on the first prescribed information. The image can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the third regulation information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time for which an image for one screen is displayed on the image display means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the third regulation information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time when an image for one screen is displayed on the image display means. The second stipulation information generating unit is configured to store image information to be transferred in one unit time among image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit specified by the third stipulation information selected by the third selection unit. In addition to the drawing information for one screen to be displayed in the one unit time defined in the one regulation information, new regulation information can be easily generated.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the third specified information storage means includes image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among image information necessary for drawing an image specified by the first specified information. If not, the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information is not stored, and the drawing information specifying means has the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information selected by the first regulation means. If the third selecting means determines that the third specifying information storage means is not stored, the updated first pointer is based on the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means. A gaming machine G4 that specifies drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, when there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information, it corresponds to the first definition information. The third regulation information is not stored in the third regulation information storage means. When the third selecting means determines that the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first specifying means is not stored in the third specifying information storage means, the drawing information specifying means The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means. Thus, when the third regulation information is not stored, the drawing information of the image to be displayed can be easily specified using the first regulation information selected by the first selection means. Compared with the case where the drawing information of the image to be displayed is specified from the new regulation information generated by the two regulation information generation means, the processing load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control unit displays the second display in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination unit from among a plurality of display modes. Second display determining means for determining a display type and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed for each of the plurality of second display types for each screen. Of the image information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed defined by the second definition information in correspondence with the second definition information, second definition information storage means for storing the specified second definition information, Fourth regulation information storage means storing fourth regulation information that defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the second display type determined by the second display determination means Before the second regulation information Second selecting means for selecting from the second specified information storing means, and fourth selecting means for selecting fourth specified information corresponding to the second specified information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specified information storing means. In addition to the first definition information selected by the first selection means, the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed specified by the second definition information selected by the second selection means is displayed for each screen. Third definition information generation for adding new image information to be added to the second image storage unit specified by the fourth specification information selected by the fourth selection unit And the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer based on the new definition information generated by the third definition information generation means every time the first pointer means is updated. hand The drawing information corresponding to one screen is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the transfer specified by the drawing information specifying means. The gaming machine G5, wherein the image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in the sub-control means, the second display type to be displayed in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination means is selected from the plurality of display modes. Determined by. Further, the second specified information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of second display types, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is specified for each screen. Second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specified information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed specified by the second specification information selected by the second selection unit with respect to the first specification information selected by the first selection unit by the third specification information generation unit. Is added for each screen, new regulation information is generated. Then, every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the new specified information generated by the first specified information generating means. Minute drawing information is specified. Thereby, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means and displayed, the second specified information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second specified information storage means. The image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  Further, the sub-control means defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the second definition information in association with the second definition information. 4 prescription information is memorize | stored in the 4th prescription information storage means. Here, the fourth selection information corresponding to the second specification information selected by the second selection means is selected from the fourth specification information storage means by the fourth selection means, and is specified by the selected fourth specification information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is the third specified information generating means together with the drawing information for each screen of the image to be additionally displayed specified by the second specified information selected by the second selecting means. Thus, new definition information is generated in addition to the first definition information selected by the first selection means. Each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. Is done. Thereby, for the selected second specified information, among the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the second specified information, image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily specified. Therefore, it is possible to reliably draw an image to be additionally displayed based on the second specified information and display it on the image display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage unit includes the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the display type image is defined. The drawing information specifying means is updated each time the first pointer means is updated. Based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means should be specified and transferred to the second image storage area The image information is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. Do Tricks machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the first prescribed information stored in the first prescribed information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Among the image information, image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined. Each time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is selected based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image by the first transfer control means. Transferred to storage means. Thereby, it is possible to easily determine the image information necessary for the selected first specified information and to be transferred to the second image storage unit, and transfer the image information to the second image storage unit. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first specified information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first prescribed information stored in the first prescribed information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Among the image information, the image information that is not held in the third image storage unit and is to be transferred to the second image storage unit is defined. The drawing information specifying unit updates the first pointer unit. Each time, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means, and the second image storage area is specified. The image information to be transferred is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. With features That the gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the first prescribed information stored in the first prescribed information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Among the image information, image information that is not held in the third image storage means and should be transferred to the second image storage means is defined. Each time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is selected based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image by the first transfer control means. Transferred to storage means. Thus, it is possible to easily determine the image information necessary for the selected first prescribed information and to be transferred to the second image storage means because it is not held in the third image storage means. Thus, the image can be transferred to the second image storage means, so that the image displayed based on the first specified information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the first specification information specifies image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit for each screen on which drawing information necessary for drawing an image of a corresponding display type is specified. The drawing information specifying means corresponds to the updated first pointer means on the basis of the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means every time the first pointer means is updated. A gaming machine H3 characterized by specifying drawing information for a screen and specifying image information to be transferred to the second image storage area in correspondence with the updated first pointer means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the first specification information specifies image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each screen on which drawing information necessary for drawing an image of the corresponding display type is specified. Each time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means is selected based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information is specified, and image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified corresponding to the updated first pointer means. Thus, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily transferred to the second image storage means at a predetermined timing in accordance with the update of the first pointer means. When drawing the first effect to be displayed, it is possible to reliably transfer image information necessary for the drawing to the second image storage means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control unit displays the display type in addition to the display type determined by the first display determination unit from among the plurality of display modes. 2 is provided with a second display determining means for determining a display type, and the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means includes, in addition to drawing information necessary for drawing an image of a corresponding display type, The drawing information necessary for drawing the second display type image displayed in addition to the display type image is defined for each screen, and the second image among the image information necessary for drawing these images The image information to be transferred to the storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means is based on the first definition information selected by the first selection means every time the first pointer means is updated. And its updated The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the first pointer means is specified, and the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is specified. Thus, the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified, and further, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified. The first transfer control means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in the sub-control means, the second display that is displayed in addition to the display type image determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display forms. The type is determined by the second display determining means. In addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the display type by the first specifying information stored in the first specifying information storage unit The drawing information necessary for drawing the type of image is defined for each screen, and every time the first pointer unit is updated by the drawing information specifying unit, the first specifying information selected by the first selection unit is added. Based on this, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and an image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means Drawing information is specified, and drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified. Thereby, when the image of the second display type is added to the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means and displayed, the drawing of the second display type to be additionally displayed from the selected first specified information. If the information is specified, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

  In the sub-control unit, the first regulation information stored in the first regulation information storage unit includes the second image of the image information necessary for drawing the image in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image. Image information to be transferred to the storage means is defined. Each time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is the first transfer control means. Thus, the image is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. Thereby, it is possible to easily determine the image information necessary for the selected first specified information and to be transferred to the second image storage unit, and transfer the image information to the second image storage unit. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first specified information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means sub-controls the first command generation means for generating a first command for determining the identification information that appears in the dynamic display effect, and the various commands generated. Command transmitting means for transmitting to the means, and the sub-control means determines the identification information that is displayed by the dynamic display effect based on receiving the first command from the main control means Determining means for determining, a first time elapse determining means for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed in the dynamic display effect after the display of the dynamic display effect is started, and a first time elapse determination Means for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since it was determined that the time has passed, and the first display determining means is based on the second time elapsed determining means. When it is determined that the predetermined time has passed and the first command has not yet been received, a restart is performed to dynamically display the identification information again as a display type to be displayed on the image display means. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it determines a visual display effect.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in the sub-control means, the identification information that appears in the dynamic display effect is determined by the determination means based on the reception of the first command by the main control means. Based on the determined identification information, the gaming machine gives a predetermined game value to the player if it is predetermined identification information. On the other hand, after the display of the dynamic display effect is started, it is determined by the first time elapse determining means whether a predetermined time has elapsed for the dynamic display effect, and the first time elapse determining means determines the time. Whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since it was determined that the elapse time has elapsed has been determined by the second time elapse determination means. The first display determining means causes the image display means to display if the second command has not yet been received when the second time elapsed determining means determines that the predetermined time has elapsed. As the display type, a re-dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information again is determined. Thereby, since the 1st regulation information corresponding to the restart effect is selected from the 1st regulation information storage means by the 1st selection means, the display in the image display means can be easily switched to the restart effect. In addition, if the identification information cannot be determined because the first command is not accepted from the main control means despite the end of the dynamic display effect, the identification information is dynamically displayed again. The player can be made aware that the identification information has not been confirmed.

  In the gaming machine I1, the first specified information corresponding to the restart effect is displayed on the image display unit in a display mode of the restart display effect different from a display mode of the dynamic display effect. A gaming machine I2 that defines image information necessary for drawing an image.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the first specified information corresponding to the restart effect is displayed on the image display means so that the display mode of the restart display effect is different from the display mode of the dynamic display effect. Since the image information necessary for drawing is defined, the player can clearly recognize that the re-dynamic display effect has been started without the identification information being determined in the dynamic display effect. .

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the first display determining unit determines the redynamic display effect as the first effect, the drawing information specifying unit corresponds to the redynamic display effect. When the image information necessary for drawing an image is specified over the entire screen specified in the specified information, the screen is recursed to the first screen specified in the first specified information and is necessary for drawing the image for each screen. A gaming machine I3 characterized by specifying image information.

  According to the gaming machine I3, when the first display determining unit determines the redynamic display effect as the first effect by the first display determining unit, the drawing information specifying unit is defined in the first specified information corresponding to the redynamic display effect. When the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified over the entire screen, the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified for each screen by recurring to the first screen specified in the first specified information. Is configured to do. Thereby, even if image information necessary for drawing an image is defined for only a few screens as the first defining information corresponding to the redynamic display, the redynamic display can be repeatedly displayed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means, depending on the type of identification information that appears by the dynamic display effect and the identification information that appears by the dynamic display effect, And a second command generating means for generating a second command for notifying an effect mode type of the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, Third command generating means for generating a third command for notifying the type of identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, and the generated various commands as sub-control means. Command transmitting means for transmitting, wherein the first display determining means is notified by the second command based on receiving the second command from the main control unit. A dynamic display effect corresponding to the effect type is displayed on the image display means, and the sub-control means receives the third command transmitted from the main control device. Based on the identification information determining means for determining the identification information appearing by the dynamic display effect, the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determining means, and the identification information determining means. The dynamic display discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the identification information is appropriate, and the first display determining means correspond to the dynamic display effect and the identification information by the dynamic display discriminating means. When it is determined that the dynamic display effect is not a game, the dynamic display effect is changed to a dynamic display effect of an effect mode in which dynamic display invisible to the player is continuously performed. J1.

  Note that the dynamic display invisible to the player is, for example, a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed that is not visible to the player, or a display that is reduced so that the identification information is not visible In this case, it also includes various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in the main control means, depending on the type of identification information that appears by the dynamic display effect and the identification information that appears by the dynamic display effect, the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect Are determined by the dynamic display effect determining means. Then, the second command generating means generates a second command for notifying the dynamic display effect effect mode type determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, and the third command generating means dynamically A third command for notifying the type of identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect determined by the display effect determining means is generated, and these commands are transmitted to the sub-control means by the command transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub-control means, based on the reception of the second command from the main control device, the dynamic display effect corresponding to the effect mode type notified by the second command is displayed by the first display determination means. A decision is made to display on the display means. Further, based on the reception of the third command transmitted from the main control device, the identification information appearing by the dynamic display effect is determined by the identification information determining means. Then, the dynamic display determination means determines whether the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are appropriate. When it is determined that the display effect and the identification information are not appropriate, the dynamic display effect is continuously displayed by the first display determining unit, and the dynamic display that cannot be visually recognized by the player is performed. Changed to dynamic display effect. Here, when the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determining means and the identification information determined by the identification information determining means are not appropriate, there is a possibility that the command cannot be received correctly. In such a case, since the dynamic display effect is displayed in a display mode in which dynamic display invisible to the player is continuously performed, dynamic without giving the player a special expectation. A display effect can be displayed.

  In the gaming machine J1, the sub-control means uses the dynamic display determination means to match the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means with the identification information determined by the identification information determination means. If it is determined that the identification information is not a specific one, the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect is identification information different from the predetermined identification information, and the identification information to be displayed only in a special case. A gaming machine J2 characterized by comprising identification information changing means for changing.

  According to the gaming machine J2, when the dynamic display determination unit determines that the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination unit and the identification information determined by the identification information determination unit are not appropriate. The identification information that appears by the dynamic display effect is changed to identification information that appears only in special cases by the identification information changing means, which is different from the predetermined identification information. Here, there is a possibility that such a situation is performed because the command has not been received correctly, and actually, a game value may be given to the player. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J2, in such a case, although it is not predetermined identification information that gives a player a predetermined game value, the identification information that appears only in a special case is Since it can be visually recognized by the player, the player can have a sense of expectation that gives some game value.

  In the gaming machine A6, the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect is displayed in the previous dynamic display effect up to a predetermined screen as information for specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen. The offset information from the identification information is defined, and after the predetermined screen, the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first definition information is defined, and the sub-control means The identification information storage means for storing the previous identification information for identifying the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, and the identification appearing in the dynamic display effect based on the command from the main control means Identification information determining means for determining information, wherein the drawing information specifying means is configured such that the first specified information selected by the first selecting means is first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect. The previous dynamic display effect defined by the previous identification information stored in the identification information storage means and the first specified information until the predetermined screen corresponding to the changed first pointer means. And identifying the identification information to be displayed on one screen based on the offset information from the identification information appearing in the step, and after the predetermined screen, the identification information determined by the identification information determining means, Specifying the identification information to be displayed on one screen based on the offset information from the identification information defined by the first regulation information and appearing in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first regulation information A gaming machine K1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine K1, the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect appears as the information specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen until the predetermined screen is displayed in the previous dynamic display effect. The offset information from the identification information is defined, and after the predetermined screen, the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first definition information is defined. Then, in the sub control means, the previous identification information for identifying the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect is stored in the identification information storage means, and the dynamic display is performed based on the command from the main control means. The identification information to be displayed by the effect is determined by the identification information determination means. Here, the drawing information specifying means corresponds to the changed first pointer means when the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means is the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect. Up to a predetermined screen, one screen is based on the previous identification information stored in the identification information storage means and the offset information from the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect defined by the first regulation information Identification information to be displayed is specified, and after a predetermined screen, a dynamic display effect is performed based on the identification information determined by the identification information determination means and the first specified information specified by the first specified information. The identification information to be displayed on one screen is specified on the basis of the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in (1). Here, in the dynamic display effect, it is common to start from the identification information that appeared in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. However, the gaming machine K1 dynamically displays the identification information in the dynamic display effect. Can be started based on the identification information revealed by the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, while the dynamic display effect ends based on the identification information determined based on the command from the main control device. Can be made. Therefore, even when the first specified information is used, an image to be displayed in the dynamic display effect can be easily generated.

  In the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect, as information for specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen, from the offset information from the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, this The predetermined screen to be switched to the offset information from the identification information that appears in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first specified information is displayed during a period in which the identification information that cannot be visually recognized by the player is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine K2 which is set to a screen to be played.

  Note that the dynamic display invisible to the player is, for example, a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed that is not visible to the player, or a display that is reduced so that the identification information is not visible In this case, it also includes various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect, the information from the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect is used as information for identifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen. The predetermined screen that is switched from the offset information to the offset information from the identification information that appears in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first specified information is dynamically displayed with the identification information that is not visible to the player. Since the screen is set to be displayed during the period, it is possible to suppress the player from visually recognizing the switching, and the player can continue playing the game without a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the identification information is assigned with a unique number, and the offset information defined for each screen is the identification information that appears in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. Should be displayed on one screen corresponding to the number attached to the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first prescribed information in which the offset information is prescribed A gaming machine K3, which indicates a difference from a number attached to identification information.

  According to the gaming machine K3, a unique number is attached to the identification information, and the number attached to the identification information that appears in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect by the offset information defined for each screen, Alternatively, the number attached to the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first prescribed information in which the offset information is prescribed, and the number attached to the identification information to be displayed on the corresponding one screen Therefore, the identification information to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the identification information with the numbers attached to the identification information.

  Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, The gaming machine L1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, The gaming machine L2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, The gaming machine L3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as slot machines are configured to control a gaming machine by using a main control unit and a sub control unit. For example, the main control of the game is performed by the main control unit, while the display control of the effect image in the image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device provided in the gaming machine is performed by the sub control unit. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP 2006-223598 A)
Here, in the sub control means in the conventional gaming machine, based on the reception of the command transmitted from the main control means, the program for displaying the effect image according to the command on the image display means is started, Display control is performed according to the program.
On the other hand, in recent years, there is a tendency that the effect images displayed on the image display means are diversified in order to further enhance the interest of the game.
However, since the conventional gaming machine is configured to start the program for each effect image displayed on the image display means, the start and execution of the program that becomes complicated and enormous with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the processing, there is a problem in that the processing capability of the sub-control unit is limited, and there is a risk that diversification of controllable effect images may occur.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and a gaming machine capable of easily diversifying display modes such as effect images displayed on the image display means The purpose is to provide.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
65 Auxiliary display (image display means)
81 Display control device (sub control means)
101 Main controller (main control means)
187 Character ROM (first image information storage means)
188 Image controller (image drawing means)
189 Resident video RAM (third image information storage means)
190 Normal video RAM (second image information storage means)
200 Pachinko machines (game machines)
281 3rd symbol display device (image display means)
310 Main control device (main control means)
313 Sound lamp control device (part of sub-control means)
314 Display control device (part of sub-control means)
423a Reservation ball number counter (waiting number storage means)
432a Data table storage area (first specified information storage means, second specified information storage means, third specified information storage means)
434 Character ROM (first image information storage means)
435 Resident video RAM (third image information storage means)
436 Normal video RAM (second image information storage means)
437 Image controller (image drawing means)
S1213 (first command generation means)
S1302 to S1305 (dynamic display effect determining means)
S1306 (second command generation means)
S1307 (third command generation means)
S1701 (command transmission means)
S2202, S2203 (part of second transfer control means)
S2507 Confirmation command processing (confirmation means)
S2508 (part of the first display determining means)
S2510 (part of the first display determining means)
S2515 (second display determination means)
S2621 (part of the first selection means)
S2622 (part of second selection means, third selection means)
S2633 (part of second selection means)
S2631 (part of the first selection means)
S2632 (part of third selection means)
S2641 (identification information determination means)
S2652 (part of second selection means)
S2711 Pointer update processing (first pointer means, second pointer means, third pointer means)
S2712 (Drawing information specifying means)
S2714 (first time elapse judging means)
S2715 (part of first display determination means)
S2716 (part of first selection means, part of second selection means, part of third selection means)
S2721 (identification information storage means)
S2722 (part of the first display determination means)
S2730 (second time passage determination means, part of first display determination means)
S2731 (part of first selection means, part of second selection means, part of third selection means)
S2783 (part of first display determination means, dynamic display determination means)
S2785 (identification information changing means)
S2724 (part of the first selection means)
S2731 (part of first selection means, part of second selection means, part of third selection means)
S2784 (part of first selection means, part of second selection means, part of third selection means)
S3002 Resident image transfer setting process (part of second transfer control means)
S3003 Normal image transfer setting process (first transfer control means)
S3201 (transfer information specifying means)
S3301 (drawing instruction information generating means, instruction information generating means)

Claims (1)

A main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub-control means. A gaming machine,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First image storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means;
A second image storage means capable of performing a reading operation faster than the first image storage means, storing the image information stored in the first image storage means, and rewriting the stored image information;
A third image storage means for storing the image information stored in the first image storage means, which is capable of reading operation faster than the first image storage means;
First display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from among a plurality of display modes;
A first prescribed information storage unit that is provided for each of the plurality of display types and stores first prescribed information that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type for each screen;
First selection means for selecting the first specified information corresponding to the display type specified by the first display specifying means from the first specified information storage means;
First pointer means that is updated as time elapses;
Each time the first pointer means is updated, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means. Drawing information specifying means;
Based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, a drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen is provided. ,
The drawing information specified for each screen in the first specifying information includes specifying information for specifying image information necessary for drawing an image for the one screen,
The drawing instruction information generating means is an image necessary for drawing an image for one screen from the specifying information included in the drawing information based on the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. Generating drawing instruction information including image instruction information for instructing information;
The image drawing means includes image information stored in the second image storage means and image information stored in the third image storage means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generation means. , Using the image information instructed by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, to draw an image for one screen,
The sub-control means is
When one image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing unit according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the second image is stored from the first image storage unit before the image information is used. First transfer control means for controlling transfer of the image information to the storage means;
A second transfer control means for controlling to transfer a part of the image information stored in the first image storage means to the third image storage means when starting up by turning on the power;
The third image storage means holds the image information transferred under the control of the second transfer control means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached,
The image information transferred by the first transfer control means is image information not held in the third image storage means,
The image information transferred to the third image storage means by the control of the second transfer control means is used to draw an image to be displayed on the image display means when the gaming machine is starting up by turning on the power. Contains power-on image information used,
The second transfer control means transfers the power-on image information first from the first image storage means to the third image storage means among the image information to be transferred to the third image storage means. To control and
The image drawing means transfers the image information read from the first image storage means when the second transfer control means transfers image information from the first image storage means to the third image storage means. Transfer image storage means for temporarily storing before writing to the third image storage means,
The second transfer control means, when transferring the power-on image information to the third image storage means, the temporary writing of the power-on image information to the transfer image storage means is not executed, When the image information at power-on is controlled to be directly transferred from the first image storage means to the third image storage means, and image information other than the image information at power-on is transferred to the third image storage means Temporarily stores the image information read from the first image storage means in the transfer image storage means, and transfers the image information stored in the transfer image storage means to the third image storage means. A gaming machine that is controlled by

Images